Toshiba Telephone DK Admin User Manual

726+,%$  
Telecommunication Systems Division  
Digital Business Telephone Systems  
DK Admin/DK Backup  
Release 4  
User Guide  
March 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Introduction  
Organization..........................................................................................................................................vii  
Conventions..........................................................................................................................................viii  
Screen Variations...........................................................................................................................viii  
Related Documentation..........................................................................................................................ix  
How To Use This Manual......................................................................................................................ix  
Chapter 1 – The Grand Tour  
Capabilities.............................................................................................................................................. 1  
Basic Operations ..................................................................................................................................... 2  
Screen Conventions................................................................................................................................. 4  
Chapter 2 – Installing DKAdmin  
Step 1: Check System Requirements .................................................................................................... 7  
Step 2: Power Up DKAdmin PC ........................................................................................................... 8  
Step 3: (Optional) Make Installation Floppy Disks ..............................................................................9  
From Windows ................................................................................................................................. 9  
From DOS Only PC.......................................................................................................................... 9  
Step 4: Install DKAdmin ..................................................................................................................... 10  
Windows PC from CD-ROM ......................................................................................................... 10  
Windows PC from Floppy Disks.................................................................................................... 10  
DOS Only PC from CD-ROM........................................................................................................11  
DOS Only PC from Floppy Disks.................................................................................................. 11  
Step 5: Run DKAdmin Program ......................................................................................................... 12  
Start-up DKAdmin under Windows 98, 95 or Windows NT 4.0................................................... 12  
Start-up DKAdmin in MS-DOS ..................................................................................................... 12  
Run DKAdmin................................................................................................................................ 12  
Set Windows DKAdmin Program Properties................................................................................. 13  
Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System ......................................................................... 15  
Chapter 3 – Installing DKBackup  
Step 1: Check System Requirements .................................................................................................. 17  
Step 2: Power Up DKBackup PC ........................................................................................................ 18  
Step 3: (Optional) Make Installation Floppy Disks ............................................................................ 19  
From Windows ............................................................................................................................... 19  
From DOS Only PC........................................................................................................................ 19  
Step 4: Install DKBackup .................................................................................................................... 20  
Windows PC from CD-ROM ......................................................................................................... 20  
Windows PC from Floppy Disks.................................................................................................... 20  
Contents  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DOS Only PC from CD-ROM........................................................................................................21  
DOS only PC from Floppy Disks................................................................................................... 21  
Step 5: Run DKBackup Program ........................................................................................................ 22  
Start-up DKBackup under Windows 3.11, 95, 98 or Windows NT 4.0......................................... 22  
Start-up DKBackup in MS-DOS.................................................................................................... 22  
Run DKBackup............................................................................................................................... 22  
Set Windows DKBackup Program Properties................................................................................ 23  
Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System ......................................................................... 25  
Chapter 4 – Using DKAdmin/DKBackup  
Before You Start ................................................................................................................................... 27  
Logging On ........................................................................................................................................... 27  
DKAdmin ....................................................................................................................................... 27  
DKBackup ...................................................................................................................................... 30  
Keyboard Conventions.......................................................................................................................... 31  
Using the Pull-Down Menus................................................................................................................. 32  
System Messages .................................................................................................................................. 32  
Error Messages...................................................................................................................................... 32  
On-Line Help ........................................................................................................................................ 32  
Logging Off........................................................................................................................................... 33  
Chapter 5 – File Menu  
Quick-start Procedures for Using DKAdmin........................................................................................ 35  
For an Existing Customer............................................................................................................... 35  
For a New Customer....................................................................................................................... 36  
Maintain Customer File......................................................................................................................... 36  
Select Customer .................................................................................................................................... 39  
Dial DK ................................................................................................................................................. 40  
Hangup Connection............................................................................................................................... 42  
Transfer DK Data.................................................................................................................................. 42  
About..................................................................................................................................................... 42  
Exit........................................................................................................................................................ 42  
Chapter 6 – Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
View Cabinet Diagram.......................................................................................................................... 44  
Check Processor Type........................................................................................................................... 44  
System/Station Administration ............................................................................................................. 44  
Programming/Updating System ..................................................................................................... 46  
Printing Port/Station Information (F3) ........................................................................................... 47  
System Speed Dial Number (F7).................................................................................................... 48  
System LCD Messages (F8)........................................................................................................... 49  
Station Port Attributes (Ctrl Enter)................................................................................................. 49  
Saving/Uploading Programmed Data (F9)..................................................................................... 56  
Flexible Button Programming Section.................................................................................................. 61  
Telephone Flexible Button Assignments........................................................................................ 61  
Add-On Module Button Assignments............................................................................................ 63  
DSS Console Button Assignments ................................................................................................. 65  
Attendant Console Flexible Button Assignments........................................................................... 66  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Dial Programming Section......................................................................................................... 68  
System Speed Dial Numbers.......................................................................................................... 68  
Station Speed Dial Numbers........................................................................................................... 69  
ACD Administration............................................................................................................................. 70  
ACD Programs ............................................................................................................................... 70  
ACD Agent Programs..................................................................................................................... 72  
Program Administration Section........................................................................................................... 73  
View All Programs (Download, Edit, Upload) .............................................................................. 74  
Security Maintenance Section.............................................................................................................. 77  
Program Security (Default Levels)................................................................................................. 78  
Directory Number Administration........................................................................................................ 85  
DNIS Administration ............................................................................................................................ 89  
DNIS/DID/ANI Line Assignments ................................................................................................ 89  
DNIS Number/Name/Ringing/VM-ID Assignments ..................................................................... 90  
DNIS Network Table Assignments................................................................................................ 91  
DNIS Tenant Lock Assignments.................................................................................................... 92  
Distributed Hunt Group Administration ............................................................................................... 92  
Call Forward Assignments.................................................................................................................... 93  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only)............................................................................................. 94  
ISDN Programs (R4 Only).................................................................................................................... 97  
Backup/Restore Data............................................................................................................................. 98  
View/Print Data..................................................................................................................................... 98  
Chapter 7 – Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
Check Processor Type......................................................................................................................... 100  
Backup Data........................................................................................................................................ 100  
Restore Data........................................................................................................................................ 102  
Upgrade............................................................................................................................................... 107  
Upgrading a Customer’s Processor .............................................................................................. 107  
Strata DK Processor PCB Upgrade .............................................................................................. 107  
View/Print Data................................................................................................................................... 115  
Chapter 8 – Options Menu  
System Installation.............................................................................................................................. 117  
Company General Information..................................................................................................... 117  
Screen Type/Color Installation..................................................................................................... 118  
Printer Type Selection .................................................................................................................. 119  
System Miscellaneous Variables.................................................................................................. 120  
User Password Level Setup.......................................................................................................... 121  
Communications Setup................................................................................................................. 124  
System Utilities................................................................................................................................... 125  
ReIndex Files................................................................................................................................ 125  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK  
Hardware Requirements...................................................................................................................... 127  
System Connection Configurations..................................................................................................... 127  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU Setup ....................................................................................................... 128  
Calling Strata DK Using the Dialer .................................................................................................... 129  
Contents  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Connection to Strata DK .......................................................................................................... 130  
Connection to Strata DK Via Toshiba  
Data Interface Units...................................................................................................................... 131  
Customer Dialer Setup.................................................................................................................. 131  
To Make Connection .................................................................................................................... 131  
Remote Modem Connection to External  
Modem/TTY Port ......................................................................................................................... 132  
Communication Setup .................................................................................................................. 132  
Customer Dialer Setup.................................................................................................................. 132  
To Make Connection .................................................................................................................... 132  
Voice Call Transferred to Modem Connection................................................................................... 133  
Communication Setup .................................................................................................................. 133  
Customer Dialer Setup.................................................................................................................. 133  
To Make Connection .................................................................................................................... 134  
Remote Modem Connection to Modem Pool...................................................................................... 135  
Communication Setup .................................................................................................................. 135  
Customer Dialer Setup.................................................................................................................. 135  
To Make Connection .................................................................................................................... 136  
PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK Modem............................................................ 137  
Voice Call First, then Modem to Modem Connection ................................................................. 137  
Communication Setup .................................................................................................................. 137  
Customer Dialer Setup.................................................................................................................. 137  
To Make Connection .................................................................................................................... 138  
PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK Modem............................................................ 139  
DIU to DIU Connection, then Modem to Modem Connection.................................................... 139  
Communication Setup .................................................................................................................. 139  
Customer Dialer Setup.................................................................................................................. 139  
To Make Connection .................................................................................................................... 140  
PDIU-DS Modem Pool Installation .................................................................................................... 141  
To Make Connection .................................................................................................................... 141  
External Maintenance Modem Installation................................................................................... 142  
Appendix B – DK424 RCTUE/F Upgrade Using DKAdmin  
Upgrading to RCTUE/F...................................................................................................................... 145  
Off-site Upgrade........................................................................................................................... 145  
On-Site Upgrade........................................................................................................................... 146  
Important Things to Do After Upgrading to an RCTUE/F Processor ................................................ 147  
Appendix C – Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Procedure.............................................................................................. 150  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0........................................................................ 151  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example......................................................................... 154  
Cabinet Station Port Counting Before/After Release 4.0 Upgrade .............................................. 154  
System/Station Administration Screen Before/After Release 4.0 Upgrade ................................. 155  
Program Changes Before/After Release 4.0 Upgrade.................................................................. 157  
Index ...................................................................................................................................................... 161  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
This User Guide introduces you to the DKAdmin/DKBackup programs (previously called  
280Admin/280Backup) which support the Strata DK14, DK16e, DK40 and DK424 digital  
telephone systems.  
Note DKAdmin/DKBackup Release 4 software supports Strata DK14, DK16e, DK40,  
DK280 and DK424 systems.  
It guides you step-by-step to mastering the few simple procedures that enable you to fully  
utilize DKAdmin/DKBackup. With this accomplished, you will find DKAdmin/DKBackup to  
be invaluable tools.  
Organization  
This guide contains the following information:  
Chapter 1 – The Grand Tour gives you a general description of the capabilities, screen  
conventions and basic operations of the DKAdmin/DKBackup programs.  
Chapter 2 – Installing DKAdmin shows you how to install DKAdmin onto your PC.  
Chapter 3 – Installing DKBackup shows you how to install DKBackup onto your PC.  
Chapter 4 – Using DKAdmin/DKBackup explains how to log on and off of DKAdmin/  
DKBackup, as well as how to use the pull-down menus, view and respond to system  
messages, and understand the keyboard conventions.  
Chapter 5 – File Menu provides easy step-by-step instructions for using DKAdmin/  
DKBackup to program and update the Strata DK, including procedures for both new and  
existing customers. The chapter also includes instructions on how to transfer data to a  
floppy disk.  
Chapter 6 – Administration Menu (DKAdmin) provides complete how-to instructions  
on using the Administration Menu options (e.g., flexible key and speed dial programming,  
system/station and ACD administration, etc.).  
Chapter 7 – Backup Menu (DKBackup) provides detailed instructions on checking the  
processor type, backing up and restoring system data, and upgrading processors. This  
menu is only available in the DKBackup program. The options available on this menu —  
Check Processor Type, Backup/Restore Data, and View/Print Data — also appear on the  
DKAdmin Administration Menu.  
Chapter 8 – Options Menu explains how to change basic system parameters, maintain  
your communication setup, view and print data, reindex files, and view system files.  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK shows how to connect a DKAdmin/DKBackup  
PC to the Strata DK telephone system.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Appendix B – DK424 RCTUE/F Upgrade Using DKAdmin  
Appendix C – Considerations for Upgrading DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
Index  
Conventions  
This guide uses the following conventions:  
Note Elaborates specific items or references other information. Within some tables, General  
Notes apply to the entire table and numbered Notes apply to specific items.  
Important! Calls attention to important instructions or information.  
CAUTION! Advises you that hardware, software applications or data could be damaged  
if the instructions are not followed closely.  
Courier  
shows a computer keyboard entry or screen display. “Type” indicates  
entry of text. “Press” indicates pressing the designated key. Example of  
both:  
Type progthen press Enter.  
+
shows a multiple PC keyboard or phone button entry. Entries without  
spaces between them show a simultaneous entry. Example:  
Delete+Enter. Entries with spaces between them show a sequential  
entry. Example: # + 5.  
~
means “through.” Example: 1 ~ 5.  
denotes the beginning of a procedure.  
denotes the step in a one-step procedure.  
Letters in [brackets] represent buttons which have Directory Numbers on them. For example:  
[DN]  
[PDN]  
[SDN]  
[PhDN]  
Directory Number button (also known as an Extension or Intercom  
Number).  
Primary Directory Number button (the extension Number for your  
telephone).  
Secondary appearance of a [PDN]. A [PDN] which appears on another  
telephone is considered an [SDN].  
Phantom Directory Number button (an additional Directory Number).  
Screen Variations  
The DKAdmin/DKBackup screens may vary from those shown in this document as selection  
items are periodically modified.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Related Documentation  
Related Documentation  
The following documents can be used to reference more information about the Strata DK  
systems.  
Strata DK Programming Manual provides all instructions necessary to program the  
system and system record sheets.  
Strata DK Installation & Maintenance Manual provides installation instructions for  
configuring and installing the Strata DK14, DK16e, DK40 and DK424. It also includes  
T1/DS-1 interface installation and configuration instructions and fault finding provides  
flowcharts to troubleshoot the systems, and user guides for stations and peripherals. An  
ACD Section provides instructions for installing ACD into the Strata DK424 and includes  
all ACD programming instructions and record sheets.  
Strata DK Library CD-ROM – contains all current Strata DK documentation and  
enables you to view, print, navigate and search publications.  
How To Use This Manual  
You can use this guide in a variety of ways, depending on your level of experience with the  
system and your assigned password level.  
If you are a new user of DKAdmin/DKBackup, you should attempt to read this entire guide. It  
introduces you to all the features and procedures of the system and will enable you to begin  
working with DKAdmin/DKBackup quickly.  
If you are proficient in using DKAdmin/DKBackup, you may still have questions from time-  
to-time about a particular function or procedure. Use the Index to locate a subject or item that  
you may have questions about, or scan the Contents.  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
How To Use This Manual –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Grand Tour  
1
Important!  
DKAdmin/DKBackup support all releases of the Strata DK14, DK16e, DK40, DK280, and  
DK424 (all processors). This guide refers to these systems as Strata DK systems.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup programs do not support Strata DK8, DK16, or any DK24/56/96  
releases.  
The Toshiba Strata DK systems are powerful, state-of-the-art modular digital key/hybrid/PBX  
telephone systems offering customers outstanding performance and flexibility. The advanced  
technology behind the Strata DK enables customers to configure a system based on their  
current telecommunications requirements. Small systems can be expanded over time through  
the addition of flexible modular units. As needs expand, so does the Strata DK.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup are interactive software applications with user-friendly menus and  
screens that let you program, update, back up and restore Strata DK.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup are DOS programs that run on your IBM-compatible personal  
computer. Although they are not Microsoft® Windows® programs, you can run them as a DOS  
session under Windows and configure them with an icon in Program Manager (see your  
Windows manual).  
Capabilities  
DKAdmin/DKBackup make the installation, programming and support process easier and  
more efficient. Among other functions, you can:  
Program, update, back up, restore and upgrade all Strata DK system databases from your  
IBM-compatible personal computer rather than from a programming telephone.  
Support DK14, DK16e, DK40 RCTUA, RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F  
processors (all releases).  
Note Whenever a DKAdmin/DKBackup screen refers to Strata DK Release 3.0, Release 3,  
etc., the function will also work with Strata DK Release 3.10. DK16e, Release 1 is  
equivalent to the RCTUA3 feature set but does not provide Distributed Hunt.  
Backup, restore and upgrade station features, port locations and Strata DK individual  
customer data programs. This includes:  
Station and system speed dial numbers  
User names  
Voice mail ID codes  
The Grand Tour  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Operations –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Voice mail message waiting ID codes  
Station and system speed dial memos  
Station and system LCD messages  
Station feature options  
CO line to station ringing and access assignments  
Flexible button assignments  
Directory number call forward status (Release 3 or above)  
Directory number message waiting status (Release 3 or above)  
ANI/Caller ID lost call telephone numbers (Release 3 or above)  
Display existing station and port data in ASCII format.  
Control certain system menu access through menu-specific user passwords.  
Use advanced search features to locate customers, features and programs.  
Backup, restore, and upgrade existing Strata DK programmed customer data.  
Transfer DK data to/from the database on the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC hard drive and/or  
programmed databases from one PC to another, using a floppy disk.  
Upgrade automatically to a larger processor.  
Note A customer database (PRGALL) that is backed up from one type of processor can be  
upgraded to a larger type of processor, but not to a smaller one. For example, a  
PRGALL file that is backed up for RCTUB cannot be restored RCTUA but it can be  
restored (upgraded) to a RCTUC/D type processor.  
Basic Operations  
The DKAdmin and DKBackup Main Menu consists of the following menus:  
DKAdmin  
DKBackup  
File Menu  
File Menu  
Administration Menu  
Options Menu  
Backup Menu  
Options Menu  
Note The Backup Menu consists of three functions also available on the DKAdmin  
Administration Menu.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Basic Operations  
The table below lists the options for each menu. A check mark () appears next to the  
functions which are available on that menu:  
Table 1  
Main Menu Options  
Main Menu  
DKAdmin DKBackup  
File Menu  
Select Customer  
Select a customer for whom you wish to program or update Strata  
DK system data.  
Maintain Customer File  
Create a new customer or update an existing customer’s basic file  
information.  
Dial DK  
Automatically select (program displays the Customer List screen)  
and dial to connect to a customer’s Strata DK to upload/download  
data to/from your PC.  
Hangup Connection  
Disconnect an online connection between your DKAdmin PC and a  
customer’s Strata DK.  
Transfer DK Data  
Transfer Strata DK customer data to/from your PC hard disk drive to  
a floppy disk.  
About  
Displays the version number of the DKAdmin program.  
Exit  
Exit DKAdmin and return to the C:\ prompt (or Program Manager, if  
configured to run under Windows).  
DKAdmin Administration Menu—DKBackup Backup Menu  
View Cabinet Diagram  
Shows PCB placement per Program 03.  
Check Processor Type  
Pulls and displays the processor type, Release and ROM/Flash  
Memory version from the installed Strata DK RCTU PCB.  
System/Station Administration  
Maintain system and individual stations/port features.  
Flexible Button Programming Section  
Maintain flexible button program assignments.  
Speed Dial Programming Section  
Maintain system and station speed dial assignments.  
ACD Administration Section  
Maintain ACD and ACD Agent programs.  
Program Administration Section  
Maintain individual DK programs.  
Security Maintenance Section  
Maintain DK program security levels.  
Directory Number Administration  
Maintain your Directory Number assignments for PDNs and PhDNs.  
DNIS Administration  
Maintain assignments for DNIS/DID/ANI lines.  
The Grand Tour  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen Conventions ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Table 1  
Main Menu Options (continued)  
Main Menu  
DKAdmin DKBackup  
Distributed Hunt Group Administration  
Maintain Distributed Hunt Group assignments.  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only)  
Maintain E911/CAMA trunk assignments.  
ISDN Programs (R4 Only)  
Maintain ISDN program assignments.  
Call Forward Assignments  
Maintain call forward assignments.  
Backup/Restore Data  
Backup, restore and/or upgrade Strata DK customer databases.  
View/Print Data  
View or print existing customer Strata DK databases in ASCII format.  
Options Menu  
System Installation  
Set up or change screen type/colors, printers, user passwords and  
communication settings.  
System Utilities  
ReIndex files.  
Screen Conventions  
All DKAdmin/DKBackup screens are organized in a similar manner (see Figure 1).  
Screen Title  
Available Printer Drivers  
Local Printer  
Hewlett-Packard Laserjet Compatible  
Hewlett-Packard Laserjet Series II  
Hewlett-Packard Laserjet Series III  
IBM 80 CPS Graphics  
IBM 80 CPS Matrix  
IBM 80 CPS/Epson LX-90  
IBM Color Printer  
IBM Proprinter  
FIND: H  
Find Feature  
Scroll Arrows  
Function Keys  
Message Line  
F1-Help  
Select Local Printer  
0903  
Figure 1  
Sample Screen  
Screen elements include:  
Screen title (at the top of the screen): tells you what screen is displayed.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Screen Conventions  
Find feature: Many of the screens in the DKAdmin/DKBackup programs have a Find  
feature for customer IDs, program numbers, or port numbers. To use the feature, highlight  
the number field you are searching (e.g., program number) and type the desired number.  
The DKAdmin/DKBackup programs move the highlighter to the field requested. If the  
number you have entered is incorrect, the program displays a dialog box telling you that it  
could not be found.  
To repeat the search, press Esc, the highlighter moves back to the first number in the  
column and you can type in the new search number.  
Note If the feature is available on the screen you have displayed, the word FIND appears at  
the bottom left corner.  
Scroll arrows: If scroll arrows appear in the bottom right-hand corner of the screen,  
additional screen information is available. Some screens cannot display all the information  
they contain within the boundaries of the screen display. Scroll arrows allow you to move  
the screen (vertically or horizontally). Taband Shift+Tabkeys enable you to move the  
bar up and down the screen vertically.  
Function keys (appear above the message line): tell you the processing options available  
from this screen.  
Message line (at the bottom of the screen): tells you important information about the task  
you are performing.  
The Grand Tour  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen Conventions ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing DKAdmin  
2
Step 1: Check System Requirements  
For optimum performance, run DKAdmin on a personal computer with the following  
minimum specifications:  
IBM-compatible Pentium® personal computer  
100MB or larger hard drive  
CD-ROM or 3.5" 1.44KB high-density floppy drive  
Note DKAdmin software is distributed on a CD-ROM disk. Installation can be performed  
using the CD-ROM disk or from floppy disk(s) copied from the CD-ROM DKAdmin  
install program.  
VGA or SVGA monitor preferred  
4MB RAM (minimum)  
Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22, Windows 3.11 or higher (Windows 95, 98 or Windows  
NT 4.0 recommended).  
A laser printer is recommended  
For network users, a minimum of 2MB of disk space is required for each person using  
DKAdmin on the network.  
DKAdmin hardware key (red)  
DKAdmin is a MS-DOS program that can be installed and run under Microsoft Windows 3.11,  
95, 98 and NT or MS-DOS (6.22 or higher). The installation and run instructions in this  
chapter include both Windows and DOS installation information.  
Important!  
If your PC has Windows 3.11 installed, setting your Windows SYSTEM.INI and DOS  
CONFIG.SYS files with the commands below may help DKAdmin run on your PC.  
SYSTEM.INI  
[NonWindowsApp]  
COMMANDENVSIZE=1024  
DOS CONFIG.SYS  
SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM/e:1024/p  
If DKAdmin displays a “Run time error” message during installation or operation, erase  
all “ntx” files under the customer directory (XXX.DK) and the “data” directory.  
Installing DKAdmin  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2: Power Up DKAdmin PC –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
From C:\280ADMIN\Data, type del *.ntxand press Enter.  
From C:\280ADMIN\XXX.DK, type del *.ntxand press Enter.  
Run ReIndex Files under Options/System Utilities Menu each time before you start to use  
DKAdmin.  
Always exit DKAdmin before you turn your computer off.  
Step 2: Power Up DKAdmin PC  
Note The DKAdmin Hardware Key must be installed on the PC LPT1 port, to enable the  
DKAdmin program to be used after it is installed. If you install DKAdmin without the  
key, it will not run.  
1. Install the DKAdmin hardware key (red) on the LPT1 parallel printer port as shown in  
Figure 2.  
Red DKAdmin Hardware Key (required for DKAdmin)  
DKAdmin  
IBM Compatible  
Printer  
Personal Computer  
Parallel Printer  
Cable  
Screws  
1994  
4ELVCH-B  
Parallel Printer Port  
LPT1 Parallel Printer  
Connector on Back  
Figure 2  
DKAdmin Hardware Connections  
Notes  
If you wish, you can install a printer on the end of the LPT1 Admin Hardware Key.  
The printer can be installed and used on the LPT1/Admin Hardware Key. But, it is not  
necessary to install a printer to enable DKAdmin to be installed or used.  
2. Turn on your computer.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 3: (Optional) Make Installation Floppy Disks  
Step 3: (Optional) Make Installation Floppy Disks  
From Windows  
If you wish to install DKAdmin on a PC that does not have a CD-ROM, you will need to make  
installation floppies from a PC that has a CD-ROM. You can make installation disks that  
install the program using a Windows application (this works on all PCs with Windows 3.x, 95,  
98 or Windows NT) or you can make DOS only installation disks.  
CAUTION! Do not use the DOS installation program on a Windows PC.  
Note Be sure to exit all programs running in Windows before starting.  
1. Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The Main Menu appears.  
...or if the Main Menu does not appear after you insert the CD-ROM, click Start, Run, then  
Browse. Select your CD-ROM drive from the Look in: pull down list. Locate and double-  
click mainmenu.exe. The Main Menu opens.  
2. From the Main Menu, select “Make Floppy Installation Disks” then select “DKAdmin  
Windows Installation Disks” or “DKAdmin DOS Installation Disks” (depending which  
target PC will get the installation). Follow the prompts.  
From DOS Only PC  
If you wish to install DKAdmin on a PC that does not have a CD-ROM, we recommend that  
you use a Windows PC and the preceding instructions to make installation floppy disks.  
However, in the rare case you are using a DOS only PC that has a CD-ROM, follow these  
steps:  
1. Place a blank floppy in floppy drive A: (or B:). Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
drive. Change the DOS prompt to the CD-ROM drive letter and type:  
cd\dkados\disk1 and press Enter.  
2. Type: copy*.*A:(or B:)and press Enter.  
3. Place a another floppy in floppy drive A: (or B:) and type: cd\dkados\disk2 and  
press Enter.  
4. Type: copy *.* A:(or B:)and press Enter.  
Installing DKAdmin  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 4: Install DKAdmin –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Step 4: Install DKAdmin  
DKAdmin is a DOS application program that can be installed and run in either DOS or as a  
Windows DOS session.  
CAUTION! If any earlier DKAdmin (280Admin) release is already installed on the PC,  
do not delete it; install DKAdmin Release 4.XX over the existing DKAdmin  
(280Admin) version as described below. DKAdmin is always installed in the  
280Admin directory, overwriting the old DKAdmin (280Admin) operating  
software but not customer database directories. Existing 280Admin  
customer data can be used with DKAdmin Release 4.XX.  
Note DKAdmin software is also available from the Toshiba FYI Internet site.  
Windows PC from CD-ROM  
Notes  
When installing DKAdmin to run as a DOS session in Windows NT, the install program  
assumes that the default directory name (WINNT) and the default system drive (Drive C)  
contain the system files. The installation procedure looks for this directory (C:\WINNT)  
and, if found, copies the necessary drivers for Windows NT onto the hard disk.  
Be sure to exit all programs running in Windows before starting.  
1. Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The Main Menu appears.  
...or if the Main Menu does not appear after you insert the CD-ROM, click Start, Run, then  
Browse. Select your CD-ROM drive from the Look in: pull down list. Locate and double-  
click mainmenu.exe. The Main Menu opens.  
2. From the Main Menu, select “Install DKAdmin” and follow the prompts.  
Important! Remember that the “Install DKAdmin” selection in the Main Menu is a Windows  
application, but the actual DKAdmin application is a DOS/Windows DOS  
session application.  
Windows PC from Floppy Disks  
Note Be sure to exit all programs before running the Setup program.  
1. Insert Floppy Disk #1 into the floppy drive and click Start, then Run. Type a:\setup(or  
b:\setup). Click OK. Follow the prompts to install DKAdmin.  
CAUTION! During installation, selecting “New Installation” overwrites the existing  
DKAdmin customer list if you already have DKAdmin or 280Admin installed on your PC.  
Although the customer list is overwritten, you can still retrieve the existing customer data  
associated to that name by adding that customers name using the “Maintain Customer”  
selection on the newly installed DKAdmin. Do this for each customer name that is overwritten  
on the list.  
2. Reboot your PC when prompted at the end of installation.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 4: Install DKAdmin  
Notes  
If you installed DKAdmin for the first time, a 280ADMIN directory was created and the  
DKAdmin files copied to it.  
If you upgraded an existing DKAdmin program, your customer database has been  
maintained in the 280ADMIN directory.  
DOS Only PC from CD-ROM  
In the rare case your DOS only PC has a CD-ROM, follow these steps:  
1. Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. Change the DOS prompt to that drive and  
type: cd\dkados and press Enter.  
Type: installand press Enter.  
2. Go to Step 3 of the procedure entitled “DOS Only PC from Floppy Disks” below.  
Disregard procedures refering to Disk #2.  
CAUTION! During installation, selecting “New Installation” overwrites the existing  
DKAdmin customer list if you already have DKAdmin or 280Admin installed on your PC.  
Although the customer list is overwritten, you can still retrieve the existing customer data  
associated to that name by adding that customers name using the “Maintain Customer”  
selection on the newly installed DKAdmin. Do this for each customer name that is overwritten  
on the list.  
DOS Only PC from Floppy Disks  
1. Insert the DKAdmin Disk #1 into drive A: (or B:).  
2. Using DOS, type: a:\install(or b:\install) at the C:prompt and press Enter.  
The Toshiba Install DKAdmin System screen automatically displays. Follow the prompts  
to install DKAdmin.  
3. During installation, if you have an existing customer file in an older version of DKAdmin  
(280Admin) on your PC, highlight the DKAdmin 4.0 Upgrade Installation  
Onlyselection and press Enter.  
...or if you are installing for the first time, highlight the DKAdmin 4.0 New  
Installationselection and press Enter.  
CAUTION! During installation, selecting “New Installation” overwrites the existing  
DKAdmin customer list if you already have DKAdmin or 280Admin installed on your PC.  
Although the customer list is overwritten, you can still retrieve the existing customer data  
associated to that name by adding that customers name using the “Maintain Customer”  
selection on the newly installed DKAdmin. Do this for each customer name that is overwritten  
on the list.  
4. Remove the floppy disk from your floppy disk drive and reset the PC to initialize the  
changes made during installation.  
5. Go to Step 3 in the “Run DKAdmin Program” on Page 12.  
Notes  
If you installed DKAdmin for the first time, a 280ADMIN directory was created and the  
DKAdmin files copied to it.  
Installing DKAdmin  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5: Run DKAdmin Program –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
If you upgraded an existing DKAdmin program, your customer database has been  
maintained in the 280ADMIN directory.  
If your Config.sys file is changed and you have problems with the new file when you  
reboot your computer, restore the original file (i.e., Config. bak).  
Step 5: Run DKAdmin Program  
Note Running the program under Windows 95, 98 or Windows NT is recommended for the  
best performance.  
Start-up DKAdmin under Windows 98, 95 or Windows NT 4.0  
Click on the DKAdmin icon. The Toshiba Title screen displays.  
Start-up DKAdmin in MS-DOS  
1. From the C:\prompt, type CD 280ADMINand press Enter.  
2. From the C:\280ADMINprompt, type dkadminand press Enter. The Toshiba Title  
screen displays.  
Run DKAdmin  
Note If the DKAdmin red hardware key is not installed, the following message displays:  
Hardware key Not Installed. Exiting to DOS. OK. Install the  
DKAdmin hardware key, then retry running the program.  
1. Once the Toshiba Title screen displays, press any key to continue. This message appears:  
Please Enter Your User ID:  
2. Type Masterand press Enter. This message appears: Please Enter Your  
Password.  
3. Type Masterand press Enter. For security, your password does not display on the  
screen as you type it.  
The default DKAdmin  
Password File  
Maintenance screen  
displays (shown right).  
It is recommended that  
you change the MASTER  
password and create any  
other user passwords.  
4. To change or add  
passwords, see “User  
Password Level Setup” on  
Page 121.  
5. After completing your password setup, press Esc. The message Do You Want To  
Copy User File Back On The Installation Disk?displays.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 5: Run DKAdmin Program  
6. Highlight Yesand press Enter. If you choose No,your new passwords are not installed  
on the disk.  
7. A “Copy to Drivedialog box displays. The box defaults to drive A:. If you do not  
want drive A:, type the drive letter to which you wish to copy the installation information.  
Press Enter. A dialog box displays asking you to insert the DKAdmin Installation Disk  
#1 into the appropriate disk drive.  
8. Insert DKAdmin Installation Disk #1 into the floppy-disk drive and press any key to  
continue. When complete, a message Process Successfuldisplays and your new  
passwords are now available on your DKAdmin Installation Disk #1.  
9. Press any key to display the  
DKAdmin Main Menu  
screen (shown right).  
You are now ready to use  
DKAdmin and can use your:  
Modified installation  
disks to install  
DKAdmin on additional  
workstations.  
New passwords to log in  
to DKAdmin.  
Set Windows DKAdmin Program Properties  
Set these properties when running DKAdmin as a DOS session under Windows:  
1. Right click on the DKAdmin desktop icon,  
then click on Properties.  
The DKAdmin Properties dialog box displays  
(shown at right).  
2. Select the Program Tab screen (shown at  
right). You should see:  
Cmd line: C:\280ADMIN\DKADMIN.BAT  
Working: C:\280ADMIN  
3. In the Run box, select Maximizedfrom the  
drop-down menu.  
4. Click Apply.  
5. On the same screen, click Advanced. The  
Advanced Program Settings screen displays.  
Installing DKAdmin  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5: Run DKAdmin Program –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
6. From Advanced Program Settings screen  
(shown at right), check only the Suggest  
MS-DOS mode as necessaryoption.  
Click on OK.  
Note Other screen settings should not be selected.  
7. Select the Memory Tab screen (shown at  
right). All fields should read Auto. If you  
make changes, click on OK.  
8. Select the Screen Tab screen (shown at right).  
The selected settings should be:  
Usage: Full-screen  
Window:  
Display toolbar  
Restore settings on startup  
Performance:  
Fast ROM emulation  
Dynamic memory allocation  
If you make changes, click on Apply.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System  
9. Select the Misc Tab screen (shown at right).  
10. Only the items in the Termination, Other and  
Windows shortcut keys boxes should be  
selected.  
NoteIt is best not to allow screen savers.  
If you make changes, click on Apply.  
11. Close the DKAdmin Properties dialog box  
and return to Step 3 of “Start-up DKAdmin  
under Windows 98, 95 or Windows NT 4.0”  
on Page 12.  
Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System  
To program or update a Strata DK, you must be connected to the Strata DK telephone  
system. For procedures on connecting your PC to the Strata DK, see Appendix A –  
Connecting to Strata DK.  
Installing DKAdmin  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing DKBackup  
3
Step 1: Check System Requirements  
For optimum performance, run DKBackup on a personal computer with the following  
minimum specifications:  
IBM-compatible 386/486 personal computer or higher level  
20MB or larger hard drive  
CD-ROM or 3.5" 1.44KB high-density floppy drive  
Note DKBackup software is distributed on a CD-ROM disk. Installation can be performed  
using the CD-ROM disk or from floppy disk(s) copied from the CD-ROM DKBackup  
install program.  
VGA or SVGA monitor preferred  
640KB RAM (minimum)  
Microsoft MS-DOS 6.22, Windows 3.11 or higher (Windows 95, 98 or Windows  
NT 4.0 recommended).  
A laser printer is recommended  
For network users, a minimum of 2MB of disk space is required for each person using  
DKBackup on the network.  
DKBackup hardware key (green or red)  
DKBackup is a MS-DOS program that can be installed and run under Microsoft  
Windows 3.11, 95, 98, NT or MS-DOS (6.22 or higher). The installation and run instructions  
in this chapter include both Windows and DOS installation information.  
Important!  
If your PC has Windows installed, setting your Windows SYSTEM.INI and DOS  
CONFIG.SYS files with the commands below may help DKBackup run on your PC.  
SYSTEM.INI  
[NonWindowsApp]  
COMMANDENVSIZE=1024  
DOS CONFIG.SYS  
SHELL=C:\COMMAND.COM/e:1024/p  
If DKBackup displays a “Run time error” message during installation or operation, erase  
all “ntx” files under the customer directory (XXX.DK) and the “data” directory.  
Installing DKBackup  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2: Power Up DKBackup PC ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
From C:\280BCKUP\Data, type del *.ntxand press Enter.  
From C:\280BCKUP\XXX.DK, type del *.ntxand press Enter.  
Run “ReIndex Files” under Options/System Utilities Menu each time before you start to  
use DKBackup.  
Always exit DKBackup before you turn your computer off.  
Step 2: Power Up DKBackup PC  
Note The DKBackup or DKAdmin Hardware Key must be installed on the PC LPT1 port,  
to allow the DKBackup program to be used after it is installed. If you install  
DKBackup without the key, it will not run.  
1. Install the DKBackup hardware key (green or red) on the LPT1 parallel printer port as  
shown in Figure 3.  
DKBackup Hardware Key  
(Teal green or red color required for DKBackup)  
DKBackup  
IBM Compatible  
Printer  
Personal Computer  
Parallel Printer  
Cable  
Screws  
(Green)  
4DGFCH-B  
(Red)  
1049  
or  
4ELVCH-B  
Parallel Printer Port  
LPT1 Parallel Printer  
Connector on Back  
Figure 3  
DKBackup Hardware Connections  
Notes  
If you wish, you can install a printer on the end of the LPT1 Admin Hardware Key.  
The printer can be installed and used on the LPT1/Backup Hardware Key. But, it is not  
necessary to install a printer to enable DKBackup to be installed or used.  
2. Turn on your computer.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 3: (Optional) Make Installation Floppy Disks  
Step 3: (Optional) Make Installation Floppy Disks  
From Windows  
If you wish to install DKBackup on a PC that does not have a CD-ROM, you will need to  
make installation floppies from a PC that has a CD-ROM. You can make installation disks that  
install the program using a Windows application (this works on all PCs with Windows 3.x, 95,  
98 or Windows NT) or you can make DOS only installation disks.  
CAUTION! Do not use the DOS installation program on a Windows PC.  
Note Be sure to exit all programs running in Windows before starting.  
1. Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The Main Menu appears.  
...or if the Main Menu does not appear after you insert the CD-ROM, click Start, Run, then  
Browse. Select your CD-ROM drive from the Look in: pull down list. Locate and double-  
click mainmenu.exe. The Main Menu opens.  
2. From the Main Menu, select “Make Floppy Installation Disks” then select “DKBackup  
Windows Installation Disks” or “DKBackup DOS Installation Disks” (depending which  
target PC will get the installation). Follow the prompts.  
From DOS Only PC  
If you wish to install DKBackup on a PC that does not have a CD-ROM, we recommend that  
you use a Windows PC and the preceding instructions to make installation floppy disks.  
However, in the rare case you are using a DOS only PC that has a CD-ROM, follow these  
steps:  
1. Place a blank floppy in floppy drive A: (or B:). Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM  
drive. Change the DOS prompt to the CD-ROM drive letter and type:  
cd\dkbdos\disk1 and press Enter.  
2. Type: copy*.*A:(or B:)and press Enter.  
3. Place a another floppy in floppy drive A: (or B:) and type: cd\dkbdos\disk2 and  
press Enter.  
4. Type: copy *.* A:(or B:)and press Enter.  
Installing DKBackup  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 4: Install DKBackup ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Step 4: Install DKBackup  
DKBackup is a DOS application program that can be installed and run in either DOS or as a  
Windows DOS session.  
CAUTION! If any earlier DKBackup (280Backup) release is already installed on the PC,  
do not delete it; install DKBackup Release 4.XX over the existing DKBackup  
(280Backup) version as described below. DKBackup is always installed in  
the 280Backup directory, overwriting the old DKBackup (280Backup)  
operating software but not customer database directories. Existing  
280Backup customer data can be used with DKBackup Release 4.XX.  
Note DKBackup software is also available from the Toshiba FYI Internet site.  
Windows PC from CD-ROM  
Notes  
When installing DKBackup to run as a DOS session in Windows NT, the install program  
assumes that the default directory name (WINNT) and the default system drive (Drive C)  
contain the system files. The installation procedure looks for this directory (C:\WINNT)  
and, if found, copies the necessary drivers for Windows NT onto the hard disk.  
Be sure to exit all programs running in Windows before starting.  
1. Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The Main Menu appears.  
...or if the Main Menu does not appear after you insert the CD-ROM, click Start, Run, then  
Browse. Select your CD-ROM drive from the Look in: pull down list. Locate and double-  
click mainmenu.exe. The Main Menu opens.  
2. From the Main Menu, select “Install DKBackup” and follow the prompts.  
Important! Remember that the “Install DKBackup” selection in the Main Menu is a  
Windows application, but the actual DKBackup application is a DOS/Windows  
DOS session application.  
Windows PC from Floppy Disks  
Note Be sure to exit all programs before running the Setup program.  
1. Insert Floppy Disk #1 into the floppy drive and click Start, then Run. Type a:\setup(or  
b:\setup). Click OK. Follow the prompts to install DKBackup.  
CAUTION! During installation, selecting “New Installation” overwrites the existing  
DKBackup customer list if you already have DKBackup or 280Backup installed on your PC.  
Although the customer list is overwritten, you can still retrieve the existing customer data  
associated to that name by adding that customers name using the “Maintain Customer”  
selection on the newly installed DKBackup. Do this for each customer name that is overwritten  
on the list.  
2. Reboot your PC when prompted at the end of installation.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 4: Install DKBackup  
Notes  
If you installed DKBackup for the first time, a 280BCKUP directory was created and the  
DKBackup files copied to it.  
If you upgraded an existing DKBackup program, your customer database has been  
maintained in the 280BCKUP directory.  
DOS Only PC from CD-ROM  
In the rare case your DOS only PC has  
a CD-ROM, follow these steps:  
1. Insert the CD-ROM into your CD-  
ROM drive. Change the DOS prompt to that drive and type: cd\dkados and press  
Enter.  
Type: installand press Enter.  
2. Go to Step 3 of the procedure  
entitled “DOS only PC from Floppy Disks” below. Disregard procedures refering to Disk  
#2.  
CAUTION! During installation,  
selecting “New Installation” overwrites the existing DKBackup customer list if you already  
have DKBackup or 280Backup installed on your PC. Although the customer list is overwritten,  
you can still retrieve the existing customer data associated to that name by adding that  
customers name using the “Maintain Customer” selection on the newly installed DKBackup.  
Do this for each customer name that is overwritten on the list.  
DOS only PC from Floppy Disks  
1. Insert the DKBackup Disk #1 into drive A: (or B:).  
2. Using DOS, type: a:\install(or b:\install) at the C:prompt and press Enter.  
The Toshiba Install DKBackup System screen automatically displays. Follow the prompts  
to install DKBackup.  
3. During installation, if you have an existing customer file in an older version of DKBackup  
(280Backup) on your PC, highlight the DKBackup 4.0 Upgrade Installation  
Onlyselection and press Enter.  
...or if you are installing for the first time, highlight the DKBackup 4.0 New  
Installationselection and press Enter.  
CAUTION! During installation, selecting “New Installation” overwrites the existing  
DKBackup customer list if you already have DKBackup or 280Backup installed on your PC.  
Although the customer list is overwritten, you can still retrieve the existing customer data  
associated to that name by adding that customers name using the “Maintain Customer”  
selection on the newly installed DKBackup. Do this for each customer name that is overwritten  
on the list.  
4. Remove the floppy disk from your floppy disk drive and reset the PC to initialize the  
changes made during installation.  
5. Go to Step 3 in the “Run DKBackup” on Page 22.  
Installing DKBackup  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5: Run DKBackup Program ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Notes  
If you installed DKBackup for the first time, a 280BCKUP directory was created and the  
DKBackup files copied to it.  
If you upgraded an existing DKBackup program, your customer database has been  
maintained in the 280BCKUP directory.  
If your Config.sys file is changed and you have problems with the new file when you  
reboot your computer, restore the original file (i.e., Config. bak).  
Step 5: Run DKBackup Program  
Note Running the program under Windows 95, 98 or Windows NT is recommended for the  
best performance.  
Start-up DKBackup under Windows 3.11, 95, 98 or Windows NT 4.0  
Click on the DKBackup icon. The Toshiba Title screen displays.  
Start-up DKBackup in MS-DOS  
1. From the C:\prompt, type CD 280BCKUPand press Enter.  
2. From the C:\280BCKUPprompt, type dkbackupand press Enter. The Toshiba Title  
screen displays.  
Run DKBackup  
Note If the DKBackup red or green hardware key is not installed, the following message  
displays: Hardware key Not Installed. Exiting to DOS. OK. Install  
the DKBackup hardware key, then retry running the program.  
1. Once the Toshiba Title screen displays, press any key to continue. This message appears:  
Please Enter Your User ID:  
2. Type Masterand press Enter. This message appears: Please Enter Your  
Password.  
3. Type Masterand press Enter. For security, your password does not display on the  
screen as you type it.  
The default DKBackup  
Password File  
Maintenance screen  
displays (shown right).  
It is recommended that  
you change the MASTER  
password and create any  
other user passwords.  
4. To change or add  
passwords, see “User  
Password Level Setup” on  
Page 121.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 5: Run DKBackup Program  
5. After completing your password setup, press Esc. The message Do You Want To  
Copy User File Back On The Installation Disk?displays.  
6. Highlight Yesand press Enter. If you choose No,your new passwords are not installed  
on the disk.  
7. A “Copy to Drivedialog box displays. The box defaults to drive A:. If you do not  
want drive A:, type the drive letter to which you wish to copy the installation information.  
Press Enter. A dialog box displays asking you to insert the DKBackup Installation Disk  
into the appropriate disk drive.  
8. Insert the DKBackup Installation Disk into the floppy-disk drive and press any key to  
continue. When complete, a message Process Successfuldisplays and your new  
passwords are now available on your DKBackup Installation Disk.  
9. Press any key to display  
the DKBackup Main Menu  
screen (shown right).  
You are now ready to use  
DKBackup and can use  
your:  
Modified installation  
disks to install  
DKBackup on  
additional  
workstations.  
New passwords to log  
in to DKBackup.  
Set Windows DKBackup Program Properties  
1. Right click on the DKBackup desktop icon,  
then click on Properties.  
The DKBackup Properties dialog box displays  
(shown at right).  
2. Select the Program Tab screen (shown at  
right). You should see:  
Cmd line: C:\280BCKUP\DKBCKUP.BAT  
Working: C:\280BCKUP  
3. In the Run box, select Maximizedfrom the  
drop-down menu.  
4. Click Apply.  
5. On the same screen, click Advanced. The  
Advanced Program Settings screen displays.  
Installing DKBackup  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 5: Run DKBackup Program ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
6. From Advanced Program Settings screen  
(shown at right), check only the Suggest  
MS-DOS mode as necessaryoption.  
Click on OK.  
Note Other screen settings should not be selected.  
7. Select the Memory Tab screen (shown at  
right). All fields should read Auto. If you  
make changes, click on OK.  
8. Select the Screen Tab screen (shown at right).  
The selected settings should be:  
Usage: Full-screen  
Window:  
Display toolbar  
Restore settings on startup  
Performance:  
Fast ROM emulation  
Dynamic memory allocation  
If you make changes, click on Apply.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System  
9. Select the Misc Tab screen (shown at right).  
10. Only the items in the Termination, Other and  
Windows shortcut keys boxes should be  
selected.  
NoteIt is best not to allow screen savers.  
If you make changes, click on Apply.  
11. Close the DKBackup Properties dialog box  
and return to Step 3 of “Start-up DKBackup  
under Windows 3.11, 95, 98 or Windows NT  
4.0” on Page 22.  
Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System  
To program or update a Strata DK, you must be connected to the Strata DK telephone  
system. For procedures on connecting your PC to the Strata DK, see Appendix A –  
Connecting to Strata DK.  
Installing DKBackup  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 6: Connect to the Strata DK Telephone System –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using DKAdmin/DKBackup  
4
This chapter shows you how to log on and off DKAdmin/DKBackup, use the pull-down  
menus and select system options, respond to system and error messages, and describes the  
keyboard conventions used in the programs.  
Before You Start  
Before using DKAdmin/DKBackup, you must:  
Connect your personal computer to a Strata DK in order to send/receive data between the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and a Strata DK (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK  
for procedures).  
Properly install the DKAdmin/DKBackup hardware key (see Chapter 2 – Installing  
DKAdmin and Chapter 3 – Installing DKBackup for procedures).  
Correctly set your communications (see Chapter 8 – Options Menu).  
Logging On  
DKAdmin  
To log on to DKAdmin  
1. After powering up your  
computer, at the C:\  
prompt type CD  
280ADMINand press  
Enter.  
2. From the C:\280ADMIN  
prompt, type dkadmin  
and press Enter. The  
Toshiba start-up page  
displays (shown right).  
3. Type your User ID and  
press Enter.  
4. Type your password and  
press Enter.  
Using DKAdmin/DKBackup  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Logging On –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
If you have entered  
your User ID and  
password correctly, the  
DKAdmin Main Menu  
displays (shown right).  
All DKAdmin activity  
originates from the  
DKAdmin Main  
Menu.  
The three items across  
the DKAdmin Main  
Menu bar (i.e., File,  
Administration,  
Options) enable you to perform the many functions shown in Figure 5. Some items may  
not be available for selection, depending on your assigned User ID and password. The  
menus shown here depict DKAdmin Master password Level 9 options.  
Important! It is recommended to run “ReIndex Files” each time you start to use DKAdmin/  
DKBackup. If files are not indexed correctly you may encounter problems using  
some functions of DKAdmin/DKBackup.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Logging On  
File  
Select Customer  
Maintain Customer File  
Dial DK  
Hangup Connection  
Transfer DK Data  
About  
Exit  
Administration  
View Cabinet Diagram  
Check Processor Type  
System/Station Administration  
Flexible Key Programming Section  
Speed Dial Programming Section  
ACD Administration Section  
Program Administration Section  
Security Maintenance Section  
Directory Number Administration  
DNIS Administration  
Telephone Flexible Button Assignments  
Add-on Module Button Assignments  
DSS Console Button Assignments  
Attendant Console Flexible Button Assignments  
System Speed Dial Numbers  
Station Speed Dial Numbers  
Distributed Hunt Group  
Administration  
ACD Programs  
ACD Agent Programs  
Call Forward Assignments  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs  
(R4 Only)  
View All Programs  
Toll Restriction Programs  
Data Interface Unit Programs  
Doorphone/Ext. Paging/BGM/Conference  
LCR Programs  
Multiple Directory Number Programs  
ANI Programs  
View System Features by Subject  
System Number Plan & Port Locations  
System Wide Option Programs  
Station Options Programs  
Station (Gnd/Loop) Co Line Assignment  
Programs  
ISDN Programs (R4 Only)  
Backup/Restore Data  
View/Print Data  
DNIS Programs  
Station Group Programs  
DKT/RPCI/OA Interface Programs  
Class/Caller ID Programs  
Distributed Hunt Programs  
Call Park Programs  
Off Hook Call Announce Programs  
Standard Telephone MW/Camp-on Tone  
Programs  
Security/Account/T.R. Ovr. Programs  
Voice Mail Integration Programs  
ACD Programs  
ACD Agent Programs  
DK Auto Attendant Programs  
Attendant Console Programs  
T1 Programs  
Enhanced 911 Programs  
ISDN Programs  
Ground/Loop Start CO Line Programs  
DID/Tie Line Programs  
IMDU or RMDS Modem/DID/DNIS  
Assignment  
Initialization Programs  
DNIS/DID/ANI Line Assignments  
DNIS Number/Name/Ringing/VM-ID  
Assignments  
DNIS Network Table Assignments  
DNIS Tenant Lock Assignments  
Company General Information  
Screen Type/Color Installation  
Printer Type Selection  
Options  
System Installation  
Systems Utilities  
System Miscellaneous Variables  
User Password Level Setup  
Communications Setup  
ReIndex Files  
1089  
Figure 4  
DKAdmin Main Menu Options  
Using DKAdmin/DKBackup  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Logging On –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKBackup  
To log on to DKBackup  
1. After powering up  
your computer, at the  
C:\ prompt type  
CD 280BCKUPand  
press Enter.  
2. From the  
C:\280BCKUP  
prompt, type  
dkbckupand press  
Enter. The Toshiba  
start-up page displays  
(shown right).  
3. Type your User ID and  
press Enter.  
4. Type your password  
and press Enter.  
If you have entered your User ID and password correctly, the DKBackup Main Menu  
displays (shown right).  
All DKBackup activity  
originates from the  
DKBackup Main  
Menu.  
The three items across  
the DKBackup Main  
Menu bar (i.e., File,  
Backup, Options)  
enable you to perform  
the many functions  
shown in Figure 5.  
Some items may not  
be available for  
selection, depending  
on your assigned User ID and password. The menus shown here depict DKBackup Master  
password Level 9 options.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Keyboard Conventions  
Select Customer  
File  
Maintain Customer File  
Dial DK  
Hangup Connection  
Transfer DK Data  
About  
Exit  
Check Processor Type  
Backup/Restore Data  
View/Print Data  
Backup  
Options  
Screen Type/Color Installation  
Printer Type Selection  
System Miscellaneous Variables  
User Password Level Setup  
Communications Setup  
System Installation  
Systems Utilities  
ReIndex Files  
1088DK  
Figure 5  
DKBackup Main Menu Options  
Keyboard Conventions  
While working within DKAdmin/DKBackup, you can use the following keys to:  
Escapes from the current screen/menu and returns you  
to the previous screen/menu.  
Esc  
Page Up/Page Down  
Enter  
Moves to the previous/next questions screen.  
Executes a screen selection/transaction.  
Moves the selection highlighter left/right.  
Moves the selection highlighter up/down.  
Left/Right Arrow  
Up/down Arrow  
Spacebar  
Depending on the screen, toggles between selections  
for the field or selects the list item and places a check  
mark next to it.  
Using DKAdmin/DKBackup  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Pull-Down Menus ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Using the Pull-Down Menus  
You can perform all basic operations from the Main  
Menu’s menu bar. When you select an item in the menu  
bar, a “pull-down” options menu appears, listing all the  
functions which you can perform (shown right).  
To use a pull-down menu  
1. Use the left/right arrow keys to highlight the item  
and press Enter. Or, if you prefer, you can type the  
highlighted letter for the item you wish to “pull  
down”:  
F
B
O
=
=
=
File  
Backup  
Options  
2. Once in a pull-down menu, you can use the same  
keyboard conventions you do to make a menu  
selection (use the up/down arrow keys or type the highlighted letter).  
3. To close a menu, press Esc.  
System Messages  
At the bottom of each DKAdmin/DKBackup screen is a message line (see Page 5). Pay  
particular attention to this line as you work, since it displays important system information and  
processing options for the application or screen in which you are currently working.  
Error Messages  
If you make an incorrect entry while working in DKAdmin/DKBackup, you are sometimes  
prompted with an error message. This tells you why DKAdmin/DKBackup cannot process the  
attempted transaction. By reviewing the error message, you will be able to determine your  
error and successfully execute the desired transaction.  
On-Line Help  
DKAdmin/DKBackup offers you on-line help for many system operations. Should you have a  
question, press F1(F1-Helpmust appear at the bottom of the screen to be active) to display  
an explanation of the operation in which you are currently working. To close the Help window,  
press Esc.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Logging Off  
Logging Off  
To exit the DKAdmin/DKBackup system  
1. Return to the DKAdmin/DKBackup Main Menu by pressing Escuntil the Main Menu  
displays.  
2. Highlight the File Menu option and press Enter, or type f.  
3. Highlight Exit and press Enter, or type x.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup shuts down and returns the screen to a DOS prompt.  
CAUTION! Always exit the program properly before turning off your DKAdmin/  
DKBackup PC. Turning off your PC before exiting the program, creates an  
indexing problem and produces run-time errors. (See Page 7 for information  
on correcting run-time errors.)  
Using DKAdmin/DKBackup  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Logging Off –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Menu  
5
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions on using the options available on the File  
Menu. The options are:  
Select Customer  
Maintain Customer File  
Dial DK  
Hangup Connection  
Transfer DK Data  
About  
Exit  
Quick-start Procedures for Using DKAdmin  
For an Existing Customer  
To quickly use DKAdmin with a previously programmed Strata DK  
1. Create a new customer record, using the Maintain Customer File option from the File  
Menu.  
2. Select the newly created customer, using the Select Customer option from the File Menu.  
3. If you will be Uploading/Downloading data between the DKAdmin PC and a Strata DK  
and you must dial via modem or Toshiba DIU to connect, use the Dial DK option to select  
and dial the customer; or, connect the DKAdmin PC directly to the DK system (see  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK).  
4. When the DKAdmin PC first connects to the Strata DK, verify that the selected customer  
processor is the same type as the one installed in the DK system. Highlight the Check  
Processor Type option under the Administration Menu and press Enter. Enter the  
applicable DK code. The Strata DK sends the processor type and version to the DKAdmin  
PC.  
5. Back up (download) the customer’s original data using the Backup option (F2) and (F3)  
from the Backup/Restore Data option under the Administration Menu.  
6. Update the customer DK data, using options from the Administration Menu.  
7. Restore (upload) the new data to the customer’s Strata DK, using the Restore option (F2)  
and (F4) from the Backup/Restore Data option under the Administration Menu.  
File Menu  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintain Customer File ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
For a New Customer  
To quickly use DKAdmin with a new installation of Strata DK  
1. Create a new customer record, using the Maintain Customer File option from the File  
Menu.  
2. Select the newly created customer, using the Select Customer option from the File Menu.  
3. Program the customer DK data, using the ACD Administration Section and Program  
Administration Section options from the Administration Menu.  
4. Dial the Strata DK, using the Dial DK option from the File Menu, or connect the  
DKAdmin PC directly to the Strata DK (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK).  
5. When the DKAdmin PC first connects to the Strata DK, verify that the selected customer  
processor is the same type installed in the DK system. Highlight the Check Processor Type  
option in the Administration Menu and press Enter. Enter the applicable DK code. The  
Strata DK sends the processor type and version to the DKAdmin PC.  
6. Initialize the Strata DK processor PCB by running Program 91-9 from the Initialization  
Programs option located in the Program Administration Menu (this option will interrupt  
service and drop all calls).  
Note If initializing from a remote location, the DKAdmin PC must be connected to the  
Strata DK via modems as shown in Figure 18 on Page 132 only.  
7. Restore (upload) the new data to the customer’s Strata DK, using the Restore option (F2)  
and (F4) from the Backup/Restore Data option in the Administration Menu.  
Maintain Customer File  
Using this option, you can insert a new customer, review and update a customer’s information,  
delete a customer or upgrade a customer’s processor.  
Note In the procedures for upgrading a customer’s processor, the word “original” describes  
the existing processor and “new” describes the upgraded processor.  
To access the Maintain Customer File option  
1. Type mand the Customer  
List displays (shown  
right).  
The list shows each  
customer’s ID, name,  
assigned directory, and  
the last date the  
customer’s Strata DK  
data was downloaded  
and uploaded. If  
upgrading a processor,  
you should always create  
a new customer,  
selecting the “original” processor (e.g., RCTUA,B, C/D, E/F) and the original software  
release (1, 2, 3 or 4).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Maintain Customer File  
To create a customer record or upgrade a customer’s processor  
1. Press Insto insert a  
record. A blank  
Customer File  
Maintenance Screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. See Table 2 for a  
description of the  
fields on this screen.  
Press Enterafter  
each entry.  
Table 2  
Field  
Customer File Maintenance Screen Fields  
Description  
Customer ID  
Enter a unique customer ID, using up to eight alphanumeric characters. If you  
attempt to enter an existing customer ID code, the system displays an error  
message: Record exists.  
Customer Name  
Address  
Enter the full customer name.  
Enter the customer’s street address.  
Address  
The second address line may be used to enter a suite or PO number.  
Enter the customer’s city, state and ZIP code.  
Enter the three character country code.  
City, State, Zip  
Country Code  
Contact Name  
Country Ph. Code  
Phone No., Ext  
Enter a contact name, as applicable.  
Enter the three character foreign country telephone code.  
Enter the customer telephone number (of the customer contact), including area  
code, and extension. This telephone number does not automatically dial out  
when using the Dial DK option and is only used as a reference for the customer  
telephone number.  
DIU String  
The first part of the DIU string is automatically entered. You must enter the  
extension number (XXXX) of the DIU (modem pool or TTY PDIU-DS) after the  
ATDD option. This string is used when DIUs are used to connect DKAdmin/  
DKBackup to the DK TTY port (see Figure 18 on Page 132 and Figure 20 on  
Page 135). The DIU String is sent to the DIU when pressing F2or F3from the  
Custom List screen of the Dial DK option.  
Modem Dial String  
Enter the complete modem string number when modems are used to connect to:  
an external modem connected to the TTY port, or the RMDS or IMDU built-in  
modems (see Figures 18 ~ 22 on Pages 132 ~ 139). This string is sent when  
using (F3)–DID/DIU/modem, (F4)–modem initial + modem dial string, or (F5)–  
modem dial string only .  
File Menu  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintain Customer File ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Table 2  
Field  
Customer File Maintenance Screen Fields (continued)  
Description  
Enter the After Connect String when calling into a Strata DK modem pool (see  
Figure 20 on Page 135). It is recommended that you enter AT~~~ATDDYYY as  
the After Connect string (where YYY is the extension number of the PDIU-DS  
connected to the Strata DK TTY port).  
After Connect  
Notes  
If you are not using the modem pool function, the DK security code can be set  
on the After Connect line in each Customer File setup so it will be sent  
automatically to the Strata DK after connecting the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC to  
the Strata DK remotely via modems. Setting the DK security code in the After  
Connect String is optional.  
In some cases, when connecting to older Release 1 processors or during heavy  
traffic conditions, the After Connect string may be sent and not recognized by  
the Strata DK. If this should occur, do not enter the DK security code in the After  
Connect string.  
DK Model, Release  
Press Enterand the DK Model, Release dialog box appears. Highlight the  
appropriate processor type and software release number and press Enter.  
DK14,  
DK16e,  
DK40,  
DK  
WMAU,  
R1  
TMAU ,  
R1  
TMAU,  
R1  
, RCTU-A,  
, RCTU-A,  
, RCTU-A,  
, RCTU-B,  
, RCTU-B,  
, RCTU-B,  
, RCTU-CD,  
, RCTU-CD,  
, RCTU-CD,  
, RCTU-EF,  
, RCTU-EF,  
R1/R2  
R3.1  
R4  
DK  
DK  
DK  
R1/R2  
R3  
DK  
DK  
R4  
DK  
R1/R2  
R3  
DK  
DK  
R4  
DK  
R3  
DK  
R4  
Important!  
For proper operation, be sure you select the appropriate software release.  
If creating a new customer to upgrade a processor, select the current release  
level (i.e., if upgrading from RCTUB2, select Release 2).  
To upgrade a Release 1 or Release 2 processor to Release 3 or Release 3.10,  
select Release 1 or 2; the upgrade process converts this line to Release 3.  
To upgrade Release 3 to Release 3.10 processors, select Release 3.  
Data Directory  
The customer directory automatically defaults to the assigned customer ID. You  
may change the directory as desired. This is the directory in which all customer  
data is stored on the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC disk drive. DKAdmin/DKBackup  
automatically adds the “.DK” extension on the end of the directory.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Select Customer  
Table 2  
Field  
Customer File Maintenance Screen Fields (continued)  
Description  
280BCKUP 1.0  
Conversion Directory  
If you chose “Upgrade Installation Only” when installing the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
program, this field appears on your screen. It is no longer supported by the  
programs and should not be used.  
Note See Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for DIU, modem, and After Connect dial  
settings.  
3. When you have finished, press Enterto scroll to the bottom of the screen. Press Enter  
again to save the information. DKAdmin/DKBackup creates the necessary default DK  
files for this processor type and customer. When complete, the new customer has been  
added alphabetically by the Customer ID to the customer list and the DKAdmin/  
DKBackup Main Menu is displayed.  
Note If upgrading a processor, select the original processor from which you are upgrading.  
For example, if you are upgrading from RCTUB to RCTU C/D, select RCTUB.  
To modify a customer record  
1. Highlight a customer, press Enterand the Customer File Maintenance screen displays.  
2. Use the up/down arrow keys to highlight a field and update the information.  
3. When you have changed the information, press Enterto scroll to the bottom of the  
screen. Press Enteragain to save the information or Escto exit without saving your  
changes.  
To delete a customer record  
1. Highlight a customer, and press Del. A Delete Record confirmation window appears on  
the screen.  
2. Highlight Yes, press Enter, and the customer is deleted from the Customer List.  
3. Press Escto close the Customer List screen and return to the DKAdmin/DKBackup Main  
Menu.  
Select Customer  
Important! Before you can use any of the options in the Backup Menu, you must first select a  
customer. If you attempt to select an option from the menu without first selecting  
a customer, the following message displays: Please select a customer  
first!  
To select a customer  
1. Type fand the Select Customer option is highlighted.  
Important! If you are uploading/downloading data between the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC  
and a Strata DK and you must dial via modem or Toshiba DIU to connect, use the  
Dial DK option to select and dial the customer. If the PC is connected directly to  
the Strata DK, use the Select Customer option (not the Dial DK option) to select  
the customer (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK).  
File Menu  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dial DK ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
2. Press Enterand the Customer List displays.  
3. Highlight the desired customer, and press Enter. The DKAdmin/DKBackup Main Menu  
displays.  
Note If you have multiple customers, you can use the Find function to move quickly to  
another customer by typing the first letter of the Customer ID number. The program  
highlights the first customer which matches your entry. Press Enterto select the  
highlighted customer or re-enter.  
After selecting a customer, the bottom of the DKAdmin/DKBackup Main Menu displays a  
box along the bottom of the screen. This box displays important information about the  
customer, including the customer name, processor type, processor software version level,  
feature key installed on the processor, and the disk directory (see Figure 6).  
Customer  
Name  
Processor Processor  
Software Type  
Version  
Feature Key  
Installed on  
Processor  
Disk  
Directory  
1085DK  
Figure 6  
On-screen Customer Information  
Notes  
If the new customer is selected, the default database for the customer’s processor is loaded  
into DKAdmin/DKBackup.  
Software version Release 3 applies to Release 3 and Release 3.1 processors.  
You now may use the options in the Backup Menu to check the DK Processor or Backup/  
Restore Data.  
Dial DK  
The DKAdmin/DKBackup to Strata DK communications link can be made via modems,  
Toshiba PDIUs or RPCIs, using the DKAdmin/DKBackup dialing strings (DIU, modem, and/  
or After Connect).  
Dialing strings are not necessary if the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC is connected directly to the  
Strata DK TTY Port (see Figure 16 on Page 130). Dialing Strings are set using the Maintain  
Customer or Dial DK menus. DIU and Modem Initialization Strings are set from the Options/  
System Installation/Communications Setup. (See Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK to  
establish communications between the Strata DK and the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC.)  
DKAdmin/DKBackup cannot be used to send or receive customer database information until a  
physical communication path has been established between the Strata DK and the DKAdmin/  
DKBackup PC.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Dial DK  
Important!  
In order for the DKAdmin/DKBackup Backup/Restore Data option to operate if you are  
using an IMDU or RMDS modem, Program 77-1, LED 14 must be “ON.” (See Prg 77-1  
LED 15 for RMDS bps rate in the Strata DK Programming Manual.)  
The DKAdmin/DKBackup hardware key (green or red) must be installed whenever using  
the DKAdmin/DKBackup program (see the figure in Substep 6 on Page 2-4).  
The modem/TTY port must be enabled (see Program 03 codes 41 and 49 and Program 76).  
To access the option  
1. Type fand the File Menu displays.  
2. Type dand the Customer List displays.  
To dial a Strata DK to upload/download data  
1. After selecting a customer from the Dial DK Customer List, press one of the following  
function keys to establish communications:  
F2 DIU/DIU: Sends the DIU Initialization String (in Communications Setup) and  
the DIU String (in the Customer file) to the DKAdmin/DKBackup COM port (see  
Figure 17 on Page 131).  
F3 DIU/DIU Modem: Sends the DIU Initialization String, the DIU String, the  
Modem Initialization String, and the Modem String to the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC  
COM port in the order described here (see Figure 21 on Page 137 and Figure 22 on  
Page 139).  
F4 Modem Initial + Modem Dial String:Sends both the Modem  
Initialization String from the Communications Setup Menu and the Modem String  
from the Customer File to the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC modem (see Figures 18 ~ 20  
on Pages 132 ~ 135).  
F5 Modem Dial String only: Switches from a voice call that is transferred  
to the DK maintenance modem. The Modem String from the customer file is sent to  
the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC modem (see Figure 19 on Page 133). You can also use  
F5to dial the remote DK modem from the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC modem without  
initializing the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC modem.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup establishes communications with the Strata DK per the procedures  
in Appendix A.  
2. When complete, the DKAdmin/DKBackup Main Menu displays again. You may now  
download or upload DK data using the options in the Backup Menu (see “Upgrade” on  
Page 107).  
To update any of the available communication dialing strings  
1. Highlight the customer from the Customer List screen, and press Enter.  
Note If you have multiple customers, you can use the Find function to move quickly to  
another customer by typing the first letter of the Customer ID number. The program  
highlights the first customer which matches your entry. Press Enterto select the  
highlighted customer or re-enter.  
2. Highlight the field, enter the new information and press Enter.  
File Menu  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hangup Connection –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
3. Pressing Enterfrom the last field on the screen, saves the new information and returns  
you to the Customer List screen. Pressing Esc, exits the screen without saving the  
changes and returns you to the Customer List screen.  
Hangup Connection  
To close the DK communications link  
1. Type fand the File Menu displays.  
2. Type hand DKAdmin/DKBackup sends +++ ATZ Hfrom the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC  
COM port, closing the communication link to the DK.  
Note The escape sequence of the modem or DIU connected to the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
PC must be set as +++using the modem command ATS2=43.  
Transfer DK Data  
To transfer DK data to a floppy disk to/from the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC hard drive database  
1. From the File Menu, type  
tto display the Transfer  
DK Program Data screen  
(shown right).  
2. Enter the drive/directory  
path you wish to transfer  
the data from (for example,  
C:\280ADMIN\XXXor  
C:\280BCKUP\XXX)  
and press Enter. (To  
switch the drive and  
directory, press F2.)  
Note XXX = The customer directory. It is not necessary to add the.DK extension onto the  
customer directory when transferring data or creating customers from the Maintain  
Customer option.  
3. Enter the drive/directory you wish to transfer data to (for example: A:\XXX).  
4. Press Enterand follow the screen prompts to transfer the data.  
5. Press Escto close the Transfer DK Program Data dialog box.  
About  
To access the option  
1. Type fand the File Menu displays.  
2. Type aand a pop-up dialog box displays, listing the name of the program, the release  
number and date, and the copyright date(s).  
Exit  
For information on exiting DKAdmin/DKBackup, see “Logging Off” on Page 33.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin) 6  
Note The Administration Menu is only available in the DKAdmin program. The Check  
Processor Type, Backup/Restore Data, and View/Print Data appear in both the  
DKAdmin Administration Menu and the DKBackup Backup Menu. These functions  
are identical (e.g., screens, operations, commands, etc.) whether you use DKAdmin or  
DKBackup.  
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions on using the options available on the  
Administration Menu. The options are:  
View Cabinet Diagram  
Check Processor Type (see Page 100)  
System/Station Administration  
Flexible Key Programming Section  
Speed Dial Programming Section  
ACD Administration Section  
Program Administration Section  
Security Maintenance Section  
Directory Number Administration  
DNIS Administration  
Distributed Hunt Group Administration  
Call Forward Assignments  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only)  
ISDN Programs (R4 Only)  
Backup/Restore Data (see Page 99)  
View/Print Data (see Page 115)  
Important! In order to use any of the options in the Administration Menu, you must have first  
selected a customer in the File Menu, Select Customer option.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
43  
View Cabinet Diagram –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
View Cabinet Diagram  
The base and expansion cabinet diagram displays the current Printed Circuit Board (PCB)  
configuration for the customer’s Strata DK system. The diagram varies based on the Strata DK  
model and processor listed in the Customer File Maintenance screen.  
To view cabinet diagram  
1. Select a customer  
using the Select  
Customer option in the  
File Menu.  
2. From the  
Administration Menu/  
Backup Menu, press g  
or Enterto display  
the PCB Placement per  
Program 03 screen for  
the selected customer  
(example shown at  
right).  
3. Use the left/right  
arrow, CTRL, Home, End, Page Up and Page Down keys to scroll the screen.  
Check Processor Type  
For the Check Processor Type option, see “Check Processor Type” on Page 100.  
System/Station Administration  
The System/Station Administration option in the Administration Menu enables you to  
program or update system ports and stations. Depending on your password level, you can have  
complete control over assignments of such items as:  
Logical ports assignments  
Telephone locations  
PDN/Intercom numbers  
DID numbers  
LCD user names  
Voice mail forward ID codes  
Voice mail message waiting codes  
System speed dials  
System messages  
Station attributes (40 individual telephone options)  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
While you can assign these attributes to individual ports, station attributes cannot be copied  
from one port to another, or set for a range of ports from this menu. However, range  
programming for ports can be completed on a program level using the Program  
Administration option.  
Some features (Intercom/DID numbers and VMID codes) enable you to set a range of values  
(default values) which can be applied to all ports, making programming quick and easy.  
Note It is recommended, if you are updating station attributes and have not performed a  
system backup recently, that you do so before updating system information. For  
information, see Chapter 7 – Backup Menu (DKBackup).  
To access the option  
1. Type aand the  
Administration Menu  
displays (shown right).  
2. Type sand the  
System/ Station  
Administration screen  
displays.  
The System/Station  
Administration screen  
displays the entire  
system as it currently  
exists. For each  
physical port, you can:  
Enter the location (room or office name) of each telephone or device connected to the  
Strata DK.  
Transfer telephone attributes to another telephone by changing the logical port  
number.  
Enter a PDN/Intercom number.  
Enter a DID number.  
Enter a user name.  
Enter a voice mail call forward ID code.  
Enter a voice mail message waiting code.  
Assign speed dial numbers.  
Assign system messages.  
Important! The DKAdmin PC must be connected to the Strata DK to upload any changes to  
this data (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for procedures on  
connecting the DKAdmin PC to a Strata DK).  
You can also:  
Print the information for all system ports.  
Print the attributes for a particular port.  
Print the Strata DK cabinet configuration.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Programming/Updating System  
To program or update the entire system or an individual port  
1. Highlight the Telephone Location field of the physical port with which you wish to work.  
Enter the physical telephone location (for example, main conference room, VP office,  
lunch room, etc.).  
2. Highlight the Log. Port No. field of the physical port.  
Note Logical port number assignments are the same as the physical port unless you wish to  
relocate (swap) telephone attributes.  
This enables you to utilize the telephone attributes (voice mail, speed numbers, messages,  
etc.) of a particular telephone at a different location. For example, you might wish to  
transfer your office telephone attributes to a conference room.  
3. Type the logical (Log.) port number of the telephone containing the attributes you wish to  
transfer and press Enter. The ports relocate after you press F9to save and upload.  
Important! Ports only relocate to the same Port Type (PT).  
4. Highlight the Int/PDN No. field. This field enables you to change a telephone’s intercom  
number. If you attempt to enter a number already assigned to another telephone, an error  
message displays: Conflict found in Int./DN numbering  
Note You cannot duplicate DNs/intercom numbers.  
...or  
if you would like to change the DNs/intercom numbers on all of the ports at one time,  
press F5. A message displays.  
Please review Program 05 either before or after making  
your changes as conflicts may arise from inserting Int./  
DN numbers which start with the same digit as the access  
codes in Program 05.  
In a default DK setting, digits 8 and 9 are used in Pro-  
gram 05 and therefore should not be used as the first  
digit of Int./DN numbers.  
Press any key to continue. A Change dialog box displays.  
PDN Port Ref. From 000 to 031, Starting DN:_________.  
Blank entry does not change value, “0” indicates blank.  
Enter the Starting Int./DN Number you wish to assign and press Enter. A pop-up screen  
displays: This operation will modify DN numbers. Go ahead?  
Press Enterto continue or highlight Noand press Enterto discontinue the procedure.  
The DNs/intercom numbers for all of the ports are changed if you enter Yes.  
5. Highlight the DID No. field. This field enables you to enter a dial-in-direct extension  
number. If you attempt to enter a number already assigned to another telephone, an error  
message displays: Conflict found in DID Extension numbering  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
Note You cannot duplicate DID numbers.  
...or  
if you would like to change DID numbers for a range of ports, press F5. A Change dialog  
box displays similar to the one shown above.  
Type the Starting DID Number you wish to assign and press Enter. A pop-up screen asks  
you to confirm the change. The DID numbers for the range of ports you specified are  
changed if you enter Yes.  
6. Highlight the Telephone LCD User Name field. Enter the name of the user assigned this  
physical port  
...or  
if you prefer, you may use DNs/intercom numbers in this field rather than names. To insert  
DNs/intercom numbers into this field for all ports, press F5.  
7. Highlight the VM MW ID Code field. This field enables you to assign a voice mail call  
pick-up ID code (enabling users to pick-up their voice mail messages)  
...or  
you may set a starting default ID prefix for all ports by pressing F5. A Change dialog box  
displays. Type the voice mail ID prefix number (example: 92) you wish to begin the  
sequence and press Enter. A confirmation message displays: All Ports Will Be  
Reset To Default Values. Go Ahead?  
Press Enterto assign the VM MW ID code. The prefix is added to each mailbox (DN/  
Intercom) number. If you change your mind, and wish to cancel the operation, highlight  
Noand press Enter.  
8. Press F9to save and upload your changes to the Strata DK, or F10to save the data to the  
customer database file.  
Printing Port/Station Information (F3)  
To print port and station information  
1. Press F3. The Select  
Printout screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. Highlight the desired  
report and press  
Enter. The Printer  
Selection screen  
displays (shown right).  
Note The current port is  
the port that is  
highlighted on the  
System/Station  
Administration  
screen.  
3. Press Enterto print the selected information.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
For information on selecting printers, see Chapter 8 – Options Menu. See Figure 8 for a  
System/Station Administration printout example.  
System Speed Dial Number (F7)  
To set or change available system speed dial numbers  
Note You may assign system speed dial numbers to individual ports for up to 800 system  
speed dial numbers for the RCTUE/F processor, 100 for RCTUBA/BB, RCTUC/D  
processors, and 40 for TMAU and RCTUA processors.  
1. From the System/  
Station Administration  
Menu, press F7. The  
System Speed Dial  
Numbers screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. Highlight the System  
Speed Dial No. field.  
Enter the speed dial  
telephone number,  
including area code  
(example:  
7145559696). Do  
not enter dashes.  
3. Highlight the System Speed Dial Memo field and enter a description of the speed dial  
number (up to 12 characters). This memo displays on the telephones LCD when the Bin  
Number is selected by an LCD telephone, using the MODE 8XXX function (where XXX  
is the speed dial bin number).  
4. Press F10to save the speed dial assignments and return to the System/Station  
Administration screen.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
System LCD Messages (F8)  
To set or change available system LCD messages  
Note You may create up to 40 system messages which may be used by all LCD telephone  
ports. Each message may contain two lines using up to 32 characters.  
1. From the System/Station  
Administration Screen,  
press F8. The System  
Messages screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. Highlight the Message  
Line 1 field and type the  
message you wish  
displayed on the first  
message line of the  
LCD.  
3. Highlight the Message  
Line 2 field and type the  
message you wish displayed on the second message line of the LCD.  
4. Press F10to save the message assignments and return to the Station Administration  
screen.  
Station Port Attributes (Ctrl Enter)  
To program or update individual station port attributes  
1. On the System/Station  
AdministrationScreen,  
highlight the port you  
wish to program and  
press Ctrl+Enter.  
The Port Attributes  
screen displays (shown  
right).  
This screen lists all the  
features available for  
an individual  
telephone.  
Additionally, you can  
view CO Line  
information, or assign personal Speed Dial and LCD Messages to this telephone. The  
definitions of each program item are listed in Table 3 on Page 50.  
2. Highlight the Attribute field.  
Note Pay close attention to the message bar at the bottom of the screen. It will tell you what  
options are available for each program.  
3. Depending on the attribute you can either:  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Press the spacebar to toggle between available options, or enable (indicated by a check  
mark)/disable (indicated by a blank) the attribute.  
Enter a value.  
4. Press F10to save the changed data to the customer database file.  
Note After saving the data, press F9to update the Strata DK with the changes. The  
DKAdmin PC must be connected to the Strata DK to upload changes to port attributes  
(see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK).  
Table 3  
Attribute Definitions  
Attribute  
Description  
Telephone  
Keystrip Type  
Four default telephone button arrangements are provided. Changing the keystrip type  
writes/overwrites existing button assignments.  
Ring Tone  
Distinctive system ringing sends a different ring tone for CO (loop, DID, or ground) line  
ringing than that for intercom, tie ringing. In addition, CO line (loop or ground) ringing can  
be different from one telephone to another.  
Volume Level  
This program sets the initial off-hook volume level for each digital telephone handset and/  
or headset.  
Speakerphone  
Enabled  
Any electronic or digital full speakerphone operation can be disabled by assignment with  
this program. If disabled, a speakerphone will act as a handsfree electronic or digital  
telephone. Initialized data enables all speakerphones.  
MIC Key Lock  
Enabled  
An electronic or digital telephone microphone can be turned on or off by using the Mic  
button. A button lock operation enables an alternate action Push On/Push Off of the Mic  
button.  
MIC on at Start  
of Call  
The microphone, as well as the MIC LED, can be selected to be on or off at the start of a  
call if the Push On/Push Off mode is chosen.  
Call Pkup  
On=AC, Off=  
AC, GP & STA  
If ON, a station or group of stations (Pickup Group) can pick up a call that is ringing  
another stations’s [PDN] or [PhDN], a call placed on hold at another station and other  
types of calls.  
Speed Dial  
Allowed  
A station may be denied the use of Speed Dial (Station and System) with this program.  
ABR Access  
Enabled  
The ABR feature can be enabled or denied for each station. The system selects the last  
line in the originating line group each time ABR is initiated.  
OCA/Busy  
Override  
Automatic  
A busy digital or electronic telephone can receive a second voice communication on  
intercom via Handsfree Answerback if the OCA feature is installed. If a calling station does  
not have an automatic function, the user must dial an extra digit of 2 after hearing busy  
tone in order to gain access to OCA.  
Forced Account  
Code  
If this feature is selected, a station or Direct Inward System Access (DISA) CO line user  
using a line with a Forced Account requirement must enter an Account Code before the  
call can be completed.  
Change TR  
If selected for this feature, a station can change Toll Restriction (TR) override codes.  
Override Code  
Change DISA  
Security Code  
This enables a selected station to change the DISA security code.  
SLT  
ANTI-Bounce  
SLT Hookflash Anti-Bounce Guard (LED 12 ON) in Program 30 prevents false recalls due  
to hookflash bounce during SLT hang-up on outside calls.  
Account Codes  
Verified  
If the system is set for Verified Account Codes in Program 69, station users must enter  
specific codes when entering Forced or Voluntary Account Codes.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
Table 3  
Attribute Definitions (continued)  
Attribute  
Description  
Change Verified  
A.C.  
If selected for this feature, a station can change the Verified Account Codes established in  
Program 69.  
Change T.C.O.  
Code  
If selected for this feature, a station can change the Toll (Restriction) Class Override  
codes.  
DND Override  
Allowed  
If selected for this feature, a station can override other stations that are in the DND mode.  
Executive  
Override  
Allowed  
This program enables a station to break into and overhear an existing station conversation  
by dialing the digit 3 after the busy station number. A warning tone may be set optionally.  
Private Override  
Allowed  
Privacy Override enables a station to enter into and overhear an existing CO line  
conversation by pressing a common CO line button.  
Page Group  
Assignments  
(A ~ D)  
Digital and electronic telephones can be assigned to intercom page groups with this  
program. Each group can have as many as 120 stations. The RCTUC/RCTUD common  
control unit can support as many as eight groups, and the RCTUB and the RCTUA units  
can support up to four. Telephones can be a member of more than one group. Station  
users can access each group separately by dialing access codes.  
Handsfree  
Disabled  
It is possible to disable the intercom handsfree function on any digital or electronic  
telephone.  
Handsfree No  
Warning  
Normally, a one-second warning tone is sent to a handsfree digital or electronic telephone  
to inform its user that someone is calling and that they can be heard. If the warning tone is  
not desired, this assignment can disable it.  
OCA Enabled  
(Receive)  
A busy digital or electronic telephone can receive a second voice communication on  
intercom via Handsfree Answerback if the OCA feature is installed. If a calling station does  
not have the automatic function, the user must dial an extra digit of 2 after hearing busy  
tone in order to gain access to OCA.  
All Call Page  
Allowed  
Assigns the station to be included in the All Call Paging group. A maximum limit of 120  
telephones (Toshiba digital or electronic) can be assigned to receive all call page.  
BOV Tone  
(Off = 2 Beeps,  
On =  
If a digital or electronic telephone [DN] is busy and it receives a call on an idle [DN] or CO  
button from another station or an outside line, the telephone receives two muted-ring  
bursts three seconds apart or continuously repeating muted-ring bursts every three  
seconds on the idle [DN].  
Continuous)  
Pooled Line  
(On = No Flash if  
No Ring)  
If on, incoming line calls in pooled line groups only flash on pooled line buttons.  
HS-OCA  
Activates/deactivates 2-way voice path to Off-hook Call Announce caller. Available only on  
digital telephones.  
WNT (Off = No  
WNT, On = S-  
OCA WNT)  
OCA  
(Off = Speaker,  
On = Handset)  
A busy digital or electronic telephone can receive a second voice communication over the  
telephone handset/headset or over the telephone speaker.  
Block Exec/  
If selected, executive and privacy override to the selected station is not allowed.  
Privacy Override  
Group Pickup  
Assignments  
(1 ~ 20)  
Stations can be divided into as many as 20 pickup groups. Station users can pick up calls  
that are ringing any station within their group by dialing a single access code for a flexible  
button, and pick up calls that are ringing stations in other groups by dialing selected  
access codes. Stations can belong to more than one group.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
51  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Table 3  
Attribute Definitions (continued)  
Attribute  
Description  
Ringing Line  
Preference  
A user, by going off-hook (or by pressing the Speaker button) may be automatically  
connected to the lowest line ringing in without having to press a CO line button or dial an  
access button.  
Automatic  
Preference  
Automatic Preference via handset off-hook or the Speaker button is the automatic  
connection to lines or the intercom under various conditions.  
Hunt to  
Directory  
Number [DN]  
If a station is busy, Station Hunting enables the ringing of an alternate station as defined by  
the assignments in this program. If the “hunt-to” station is busy, the system tries to ring the  
next “hunt-to” station, and so on.  
Standard  
Telephone  
Camp-on Tone  
Camp-on tone is sent when the busy standard telephone receives a transferred CO line  
call. Camp-on tone is two one-second bursts of 1209Hz/interrupted by 160ms bursts,  
three-seconds apart.  
Hold/ParkRecall  
Time  
Each station can have a different time (from 011 to 160 seconds) from the point of placing  
a call on hold or park to the point of recall.  
MW Lamp  
Turns on and off a message waiting LED for EKT and flash button.  
(Off = No Lamp,  
On= With Lamp)  
LCD Personal  
Messages (10-  
19) Allowed  
This option enables LCD digital and electronic telephones to store up to ten personal  
messages and offers the option of entering alphanumeric memos for each of the LCD’s  
Station Speed Dial numbers.  
Hold Display  
Scroll  
(On=Enabled)  
Disables/enables the Hold Display Scroll feature independently for each telephone. When  
more than one call is on hold on a telephone, the Hold Display Scroll feature enables a  
user to scroll through the held lines.  
Key13-TR/14-TR  
After Answer  
Determines whether or not a toll restricted telephone user is allowed to dial additional  
digits after answering an incoming CO line call. Initialized data sets both LEDs off for all  
telephone users. Both LEDs should be turned on for Toll Restricted telephones that must  
answer incoming CO line calls and use speed dial buttons programmed to Hold or Park  
calls and access the page system automatically.  
No CF/NA  
Handsfree  
A Handsfree Answerback call to an idle station in the Call Forward No-Answer or Call  
Forward-Busy/No Answer mode does not forward if this feature is activated. This prevents  
the call from being forwarded 8 ~ 60 seconds after the called party has been talking in the  
handsfree talk mode (handset on-hook). Outside calls and busy intercom calls to the  
station continues to forward with this feature set.  
DKT2000 Cont.  
DTMF Tones Off  
2000-series Digital Telephones can send DTMF tones for as long as station users press  
their buttons (80 msec. minimum). This feature can be disabled with LED 17. If disabled,  
DTMF tones sent by these telephones are either 80 or 160 milliseconds, depending on the  
selection made with Program 10-1, LED 04 and Program 10-2, LED 06.  
Automatic Hold  
If this feature is allowed, station users with CO line buttons can place a CO line or intercom  
call on hold automatically by pressing another CO line button, or the DN/intercom button  
and dialing the number.  
Busy Station  
Ringing/Busy  
Station Transfer  
Busy Station Ringing (BSR) and Busy Station Transfer (BST) operate together to ensure  
that a busy station always receives transferred line calls along with LED and tone  
indications. The station or Voice mail (VM)/auto attendant device that transfers the call  
must be programmed with BST (LED 20 ON) and the one that receives it must have BSR  
(LED 19).  
Fixed Call  
Forward to  
Station Port  
Fixed Call Forwarding is different from other station Call Forwarding options. It is fixed in  
terms of the destination station number which is assigned in this program. The station user  
cannot change the Fixed Call Forward destination, unlike the other station Call Forwarding  
options.  
Ring Transfer  
(Camp-on) Time  
If a busy or ringing station does not answer a call sent to it via call transfer (CO line or over  
tie lines), the station originating the transfer is recalled after an amount of time determined  
with this program.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
Table 3  
Attribute Definitions (continued)  
Attribute  
Description  
LCR Station  
Group  
This option assigns the station to a particular LCR group routing scheme. The Least Cost  
Routing (LCR) feature enables the system to automatically route each outgoing voice call  
over common carriers and selected lines. The customer chooses these lines for the  
specific time of day, and for system users with varying priorities.  
Station T.R. Digit  
Restriction  
Digit Toll Restriction involves the system analyzing the area and office codes, and  
selectively enabling/disabling outgoing calls following the criteria defined in Area Code  
Tables and Office Code Tables. If T.R. Digit Restriction is enabled, a station cannot dial  
digits after dialing a telephone number.  
Station T.R.  
Restriction  
Code  
Each of the Toll Restriction classes established in Program 46 can be assigned a code  
with this program. If one of these codes is entered at a station, the station assumes the  
code’s class for that call. When the call is complete, the station returns to its regular class  
assigned in Program 48.  
Copy Range (F2)  
To copy a range of attributes  
1. Press F2from the Port  
Attributes screen and a  
pop-up dialog box  
displays (shown right),  
warning you of the  
consequences of using  
this feature.  
2. Press any key to continue and a pop-up box requesting port numbers displays: Copy to  
Port(s): 000 to 079.  
3. Enter the port numbers in the from and to fields. A warning message appears if you enter a  
number out of range. A pop-up dialog box displays asking you to confirm the copy  
request.  
4. Highlight Yesand press Enterto continue or press Enterto discontinue and return to  
the Port Attribute screen.  
5. If you answered Yesin Step 4, another pop-up dialog box displays: Do You Want to  
Copy PRG38/PRG39-Flexible Key Assignments Also?  
Highlight Yesand press Enterto copy to the PRG38/39 Key Assignments and range of  
ports. Press Enterto only copy to the range of ports.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
53  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Flexible Button Assignments (F5)  
To view or change flexible button assignments  
1. Press F5from the Port  
Attributes screen and the  
Port Flexible Key  
Assignments screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. To change a flexible  
button assignment,  
highlight the Flexible  
Key Assignment and  
press:  
F5–Pause to  
deactivate or blank  
out a key  
assignment.  
F9–Increment SD to add multiple speed dial key assignments.  
Important! You can only use this key when you are assigning more than one speed dial key at  
a time. If you have not just added a speed dial key assignment, the message Must  
Assign System/Station Speed Dial Firstdisplays.  
If you leave the cursor in the same field and continue to press F8, the speed dial  
key number increments. To add consecutive speed dial key assignments, you must  
continue to highlight the next field before pressing F8.  
3. Press Escto return to the Port Attributes screen.  
Important!  
After restoring flexible keys (Program 39) data, turn the DK system off for five seconds,  
then turn it back on to apply the changes made.  
If you change the keystrip type (Program 38) from the station attribute screen, all keystrip  
buttons will be set to Program 38 default assignments. If you wish to change a keystrip  
type (from 20 to 10, for example) and save the existing (first 10) key button assignments,  
operate Program 38 from the Program Administration Section option.  
To copy selected keys to selected ports  
1. Press Ctrl+F2and a pop-up dialog  
box displays (shown at right).  
2. Press any key to continue.  
3. Highlight a key and press the spacebar  
to select. An asterisk appears next to  
your selection. Continue until all the  
keys you want to copy have been  
selected.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
4. Press Ctrl+F2again. A pop-up  
dialog box displays (shown at right).  
5. Type the desired ports and press  
Enter. Another pop-up dialog box  
displays asking you confirm the  
change.  
6. Highlight Yesand press Enterto make the change or Noto cancel the changes.  
7. Press F10to save the changes you just made.  
CO Line Assignments (F6)  
To view CO line assignments  
1. Press F6from the Port  
Attributes screen. The  
Port CO Line  
Information screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. To turn any program  
on/off, highlight the  
program number for  
the CO Line and press  
the spacebar. A check  
mark indicates the  
program is on.  
3. Press Escto return to the Port Attributes screen.  
Speed Dial Assignments (F7)  
To assign speed dial assignments  
Press F7from the Port  
Attributes screen. The  
Port Speed Dial  
Numbers & Memos  
screen displays (shown  
right). Refer to Page  
68 for procedures.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
System Messages (F8)  
To assign system messages  
Press F8from the Port  
Attributes screen. The  
Port Personal  
Messages screen  
displays (shown right).  
Refer to Page 49 for  
procedures.  
Saving/Uploading Programmed Data (F9)  
To upload programmed data  
After completing your programming, press F9to save the information and begin the  
uploading process. See “Restore Data” on Page 102 for complete procedures.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
Printout Examples  
Customer Name  
PCB Placement Per Program 03 Assignments  
CABINET 1  
PCB Type  
Port Nos.  
Line Nos  
Option  
R11  
RCTU  
S11  
S12  
S13  
S14  
S15  
S16  
RCTUB  
PDKU  
PDKU  
RSTU  
RATU  
RDTU  
PIOU  
000~007  
RRCS-8  
008~015  
OCA  
016~023  
024~027  
028~035  
001~008  
8-TDGL  
OCA  
TTY/MDU  
CABINET 2  
PCB Type  
Port Nos.  
Line Nos  
Option  
S21  
S22  
S23  
S24  
S25  
S26  
S27  
S28  
RSTU  
036~043  
RCOU  
RSTU  
044~051  
PIOU  
RDTU  
052~059  
017~924  
8-TDGL  
PDKU  
060~067  
009~016  
RCOS  
ACD/MIS  
Figure 7  
Cabinet PCB Installation Printout  
CUSTOMER NAME  
System Speed Dial  
System Speed Dial  
Bin Number  
System  
Speed Dial Number  
System  
Speed Dial Memo  
600  
601  
602  
603  
604  
605  
6....  
17145833700  
13124675889  
1723727173721  
4773938  
4737473  
4789994  
TOSHIBA  
CHICAGO  
NEW YORK  
DOWN  
TOWN  
DEALER A  
DEALER B  
434...  
Figure 8  
System Speed Dial Numbers  
(prints out with System/Station Administration Report)  
CUSTOMER NAME  
System Messages  
System LCD  
Message Number  
Message  
Line 1  
Message  
Line 2  
060  
061  
062  
063  
064  
06...  
OUT TO LUNCH  
IN A MEETING  
CALL BOB AT 3:00  
BACK AT 7 PM  
UNTIL 1:00PM  
UNTIL 2:30PM  
583-1111  
OR 8PM I HOPE  
OR TUESDAY  
RETURN ON MONDAY  
Figure 9  
System Telephone LCD Messages  
(prints out with System/Station Administration Port)  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
System/Station Administration  
C
S
Phy.  
Port  
No.  
Log  
Port  
No.  
Telephone  
Location  
Int.  
No.  
DID  
No.  
VM CF  
ID Code  
VM MW  
ID Code  
PT  
Telephone LCD  
User Name  
N
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
DO  
OFFICE #114  
OFFICE #112  
OFFICE #109  
OFFICE #87  
OFFICE #107  
CAFETERIA  
SHIPPING DOCK  
CONFERENCE  
PHONE ROOM  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
3200  
3201  
3202  
3203  
3204  
3205  
3206  
3207  
3208  
3200 SALLY  
3201 LINDA  
3202 GARDEN  
3203 HARDWARE 3203  
3204 FRED C  
3205  
3206  
3207  
3208  
3200  
3201  
3202  
91200  
92201  
92202  
92203  
92204  
92205  
92206  
92207  
92208  
92200  
93201  
23202  
93203  
93204  
93205  
93206  
93207  
93208  
3204  
Cabinet Slot Number in which the port is installed.  
Physical Port Numbers: RCTA = 001~031; RCTUB = 000~079; RCTUC/D = 000~239; RCTUE/F = 000~335  
Port Type: DKAdmin scans Program 03 and identifies all physical ports and reads other programs as shown by ( ) to  
identify special ports.  
Special Ports  
AG - ACD Announcement Port (Prog 14-3)  
AM - ACD Music Port (Prog 14-3)  
AP - AA Primary Announcer (Prog 23)  
AS - AA Secondary Announcer (Prog 24)  
BM - Background Music Port (Prog 03, 10-2/LED 09/10, 19)  
DI - PDIU-DI Port (Prog 20)  
Port Identification Codes  
AC - Attendant Console Port (Prog 03, code 51)  
DL - DID Line Port (Prog 03, code 71~73 and *41-2)  
DD - Digital Port with DSS (Prog 03, code 63, 64)  
DO - Digital Port with OCA (Prog 03, code 62, 64, 28)  
DT - Digital Port (Prog 03, code 61, 63, 27)  
ED - Electronic Port with DSS (Prog 03, code 23, 24)  
EO - Electronic Port with EOCU (Prog 03, code 22, 24,  
26)  
DS - PDIU-DS Port (Prog 20)  
DP - Doorphone Port (Prog 77-1)  
EA - External Amplifier Port (Prog 10-3)  
MP - Modem Pool (Prog 21)  
VM - Voice Mail Port (Prog 31, LED 17 ON)  
ET - Electronic Port (Prog 03, code 21, 23, 25)  
ST - Standard Port (Prog 03, code 25~31)  
TL - TIE Line Port (Prog 03, code 71~73 and *41-2)  
VA - Vacant Port (Prog 03, code DO)  
PT - Port Type  
This is a test field in which the location of the physical port wiring termination point (telephone jack) may be entered.  
Logical Port associated with physical port.  
Intercom number associated with logical port.  
Direct-in-Dial number associated with logical port. (Column not available in DKAdmin R4 or higher software.)  
LCD User Name associated with logical port.  
Voice Mail Call Forward (#656) code.  
Voice Mail Message Retrieve (#657) code.  
Figure 10  
Basic Telephone/Port Assignments  
(prints out with System/Station Administration Report)  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System/Station Administration  
CUSTOMER NAME  
Intercom 202/Port 002 Attributes for BRIAN No: 202  
PRG  
KEY  
Feature Description  
Attribute  
20-Button (A)  
3
3
38  
80  
27  
30  
30  
Telephone Keystrip Type  
Ring Tone  
Volume Level  
Speakerphone Enabled  
MIC Key Lock Enabled  
01  
02  
Figure 11  
Station Attributes by Station  
(prints out with current port attributes)  
CUSTOMER NAME  
Intercom 202/Port 002 Flexible Key Assignments for BRIAN No: 202  
Key  
No.  
Key  
No.  
Flexible Key Assignment  
Flexible Key Assignment  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
ACD - Log In/Out  
Station Speed Dial 011  
Station Speed Dial 010  
ACD - Agent Not Available  
ACD - Pickup  
ACD - End of Shift  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
System Speed Dial 605  
System Speed Dial 604  
ACD - Cancel Queue Alarm  
ACD - Monitor Call  
System Speed Dial 600  
System Speed Dial 601  
System Speed Dial 602  
System Speed Dial 603  
ACD - Help  
ACD - Wrap Up  
ACD - Record Account  
Speed Dial Select (*Key)  
Pooled Line 302  
1
Intercom  
Figure 12  
Flexible Key Assignments by Station  
(prints out with current port attributes)  
CUSTOMER NAME  
Intercom 202/Port 002 Speed Dial Numbers & Memos for BRIAN No: 202  
Speed Dial  
Bin Number  
Speed Dial  
Number  
Speed Dial  
Memo  
010  
011  
012  
013  
7584930  
5849605  
5840396  
HOME  
MARY  
DOCTOR JONES  
Figure 13  
Station Speed Dial/Memos by Station  
(prints out with current port attributes)  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
59  
System/Station Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
CUSTOMER NAME  
Intercom 202/Port 002 Personal Messages for BRIAN No: 202  
Personal  
Message Number  
Message  
Line 1  
Message  
Line 2  
010  
011  
CALL BRIAN ASAP  
OUT OF OFFICE  
UNTIL AUG. 15  
Figure 14  
Station Personal LCD Messages by Station  
(prints out with current port attributes)  
CUSTOMER NAME  
Intercom 202/Port 002 CO Line Information for BRIAN No: 202  
CO  
Line  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
40  
41  
43  
*81  
*84  
*87  
001  
002  
003  
81 - Program 81 - DAY Immediate Ring  
82 - Program 82 - DAY 12 Second Delay Ring  
83 - Program 83 - DAY 24 Second Delay Ring  
84 - Program 84 - DAY 2 Immediate Ring  
85 - Program 85 - DAY 2 12 Second Delay Ring  
86 - Program 86 - DAY 2 24 Second Delay Ring  
87 - Program 87 - NIGHT Immediate Ring  
88 - Program 88 - NIGHT 12 Second Delay Ring  
89 - Program 89 - NIGHT 24 Second Delay Ring  
40 - Program 40 - Station CO Line Access (Incoming/Outgoing)  
41 - Program 41 - Station Outgoing Call Restriction  
43 - Program 43 - 0+ Credit Card Dialing Option  
*81~*87 - Programs *81~*87 - Ground/Loop/Start/CO Line to [DN] LED  
Flash Assignments  
Figure 15  
Station CO Line Ringing and Access Assignment by Station  
(prints out with current port attributes)  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Flexible Button Programming Section  
Flexible Button Programming Section  
The Flexible Key Programming Section option in the Administration Menu enables you to  
maintain flexible button assignments for telephones, add-on modules, DSS consoles and  
attendant consoles.  
To access flexible button assignments  
1. Type aand the  
Administration Menu  
appears.  
2. Type uand the Flexible  
Key Program  
Administration screen  
displays (shown right).  
Telephone Flexible Button Assignments  
To access the option  
Press Enterand the  
Telephone Flexible Button  
Key Assignments screen  
displays (shown right).  
This screen enables you to  
assign features to 10 or 20  
telephone buttons for each  
of your logical ports,  
individually or by range.  
You can also copy buttons  
from one port to another or  
to a range of ports for  
quick and easy feature editing.  
When copying keystrips, you can choose to copy (or not copy) over existing PDNs and/or  
PhDNs on the “Copy to” port or port range.  
To change an assigned button  
1. Highlight the port you  
want to change, press F5,  
and the Port Flexible Key  
Assignments screen  
(shown at right) for that  
port displays.  
2. Highlight the key you wish  
to change.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flexible Button Programming Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
3. Press F2to make the key a Primary DN, F3a Secondary DN, F4a Phantom DN, or F6to  
change the key feature.  
If you press F3or F4, a pop-up list appears and you must enter a primary or secondary  
number. If the number you enter does not exist, the following warning message appears  
and you must re-enter the number.  
DN Does Not Exist. Please Refer to Program *04.  
...or  
press F5to deactivate or blank out a key assignment  
...or  
if you press F6, a  
feature pop-up list  
displays (shown right).  
Highlight the feature  
you want to assign to  
the button and press  
Enter. Some entries  
(such as the CO Line  
feature) require you  
enter a value when  
making an assignment.  
The selected feature  
replaces the previous  
feature.  
Note You can only assign a feature to one button within a port. If you attempt to assign a  
feature already assigned, an error message displays.  
...or  
press F8to add multiple speed dial key assignments.  
Important! You can only use this key when you are assigning more than one speed dial key at  
a time. If you have not just added a speed dial key assignment, the message Must  
Assign System/Station Speed Dial Firstdisplays.  
If you leave the cursor in the same field and continue to press F8, the speed dial  
key number increments. To add consecutive speed dial key assignments, you must  
continue to highlight the next field before pressing F8.  
To copy selected keys to selected ports  
1. Press Ctrl+F2and a pop-up dialog  
box displays (shown at right).  
2. Press any key to continue.  
3. Highlight a key and press the spacebar  
to select. A asterisk appears next to  
your selection. Continue until all the  
keys you want to copy have been  
selected.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Flexible Button Programming Section  
4. Press Ctrl+F2again. A pop-up  
dialog box displays (shown at right).  
5. Type the desired ports and press  
Enter. Another pop-up dialog box  
displays asking you confirm the  
change.  
6. Highlight Yesand press Enterto make the change or Noto cancel the changes.  
7. Press F10to save the changes you just made.  
Add-On Module Button Assignments  
To access the option  
1. Highlight the Add-On Module Button Assignments option and press Enter.  
If you have not yet assigned an add-on module to any of your ports, a message displays:  
No Ports Have Add-on Modules. Do You Want To Add A Port?  
To add a port, press Enter. A Port Number pop-up box displays: Port Number  
000.  
Type the port  
number for which  
you wish to edit add-  
on module button  
assignments. The  
Add-On Module  
Button Assignments  
screen displays  
(shown right).  
This screen enables  
you to assign  
features (CO Line,  
Direct Station,  
Station Speed Dial or System Speed Dial) to 20 LED buttons on two add-on modules  
(for a total of 40) to any of the physical ports. You can also copy features from one  
port to another for quick and easy feature editing.  
To make assignments to another port  
1. Press F2and a Port Number pop-up dialog box displays.  
2. Type the port number that you wish to work with. If you have not assigned an add-on  
module to the specified port, a message displays:  
Port does not have add-on module. Add?  
3. Press Enterto add an Add-On Module  
...or  
scroll through the current Add-On Modules by pressing the +key to display the next port,  
or the -key to display the previous port.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
63  
Flexible Button Programming Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To copy the features from one port to another  
1. Highlight the LED you wish to copy and press F4. The Copy to Port dialog box displays.  
2. Type the range of port numbers that you wish to copy TO.  
3. Highlight the Button Assignment Column of Add-On Module 1 or 2 for the LED you wish  
to change and press F3. A message displays at the top of the screen:  
Current template copied from port XXX.  
Press Enterto display the Feature pop-up box.  
4. Highlight the feature you want to assign to the button and press Enter. A value entry  
pop-up box displays.  
5. Enter the appropriate number or code for the selected feature. The feature is copied from  
this port to the ports specified in Step 2.  
6. Repeat Steps 1 ~ 5 for each button you wish to copy.  
7. Press F10to save your changes and return to the Flexible Key Program Administration  
screen.  
To clear the port  
1. To clear the port and return to the default settings for all options, press F5. A message  
displays: Are you sure?  
2. Press Enterto clear the port.  
To change an assigned feature  
1. Highlight the Button  
Assignment column  
for either Add-On  
Module 1 or 2 for the  
LED you wish to  
change and press F6.  
A feature pop-up list  
displays (shown right).  
2. Highlight the feature  
you want to assign to  
the button and press  
Enter. A value entry  
pop-up displays.  
3. Enter the appropriate  
number or code for the selected feature.  
Note You can only assign a feature to one button per port. If you attempt to assign a feature  
already assigned, an error message displays.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Flexible Button Programming Section  
To assign more than one speed dial number  
1. Follow the procedure for changing an assigned feature and assign a station/system speed  
dial number.  
2. Press F8+ SDto add additional speed dial key assignments.  
Important! You can only use this key when you are assigning more than one speed dial key at  
a time. If you have not just added a speed dial key assignment, the message Must  
Assign System/Station Speed Dial Firstdisplays.  
If you leave the cursor in the same field and continue to press F8, the speed dial  
key number increments. To add consecutive speed dial key assignments, you must  
continue to highlight the next field before pressing F8.  
DSS Console Button Assignments  
To access the option  
Highlight the DSS  
Console Button  
Assignments option  
and press Enter. The  
DSS Console Button  
Assignments screen  
displays (shown right)  
which enables you to  
assign features to 20  
DSS console key  
buttons.  
To reset all keys and return them  
to their default settings  
1. Press F5. A message displays: Are you sure you want to reset flexible  
keys?  
2. Highlight Yesand press Enterto reset the keys or press Enterto terminate the  
resetting.  
To change an assigned feature  
1. Highlight the key  
assignment you wish to  
change and press F6. A  
feature pop-up list  
displays (shown right).  
2. Highlight the feature you  
want to assign to the  
button and press Enter.  
Some entries (such as the  
CO Line feature) require  
you type a value when  
making an assignment.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flexible Button Programming Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
The selected feature replaces the previous feature.  
Notes  
You can only assign a feature to one button within a console. If you attempt to assign a  
feature already assigned, an error message displays.  
Press F8Increment SDto add additional speed dial key assignments.  
Important! You can only use this key when you are assigning more than one speed dial key at  
a time. If you have not just added a speed dial key assignment, the message Must  
Assign System/Station Speed Dial Firstdisplays.  
If you leave the cursor in the same field and continue to press F8, the speed dial  
key number increments. To add consecutive speed dial key assignments, you must  
continue to highlight the next field before pressing F8.  
3. After setting each key, press F10to save your changes and return to the Flexible Key  
Program Administration screen.  
To make assignments to another console or console group  
1. Scroll to another console/console group (+scrolls forward, - scrolls backward).  
2. Press Escto close the DSS Console Button Assignments screen and return to the Flexible  
Key Program Administration screen.  
Attendant Console Flexible Button Assignments  
Note This option cannot be used by Strata DK Release 2 or below.  
To access the option  
Highlight the Attendant  
Console Flexible Button  
Assignments option and  
press Enter. The  
Attendant Console  
Flexible Button  
Assignments screen  
displays (shown right).  
This screen enables you  
to assign features to both  
left and right key  
assignments.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Flexible Button Programming Section  
To edit your attendant console flexible button assignments  
1. Highlight the key  
assignment you wish  
to change and press  
F6. A feature pop-up  
list displays (shown  
right).  
2. Use the +/-keys or  
the Page Up/Page  
Downkeys to scroll  
through the list.  
Highlight the feature  
you want to assign to  
the key and press  
Enter. The selected feature replaces the previous feature.  
3. To move between the left and right key assignments, press F2.  
You can only assign a feature to one button within a console. If you attempt to assign a  
feature already assigned, an error message displays.  
Press F8+ SDto add additional speed dial key assignments.  
Important! You can only use this key when you are assigning more than one speed dial key at  
a time. If you have not just added a speed dial key assignment, the message Must  
Assign System/Station Speed Dial Firstdisplays.  
If you leave the cursor in the same field and continue to press F8, the speed dial  
key number increments. To add consecutive speed dial key assignments, you must  
continue to highlight the next field before pressing F8.  
4. After setting each key, press F10to save your changes and return to the Flexible Key  
Program Administration screen.  
To reset all keys and return them to their default settings  
1. Press F5. A message displays:  
Are you sure you want to reset flexible keys?  
2. Press Enterto reset the keys.  
To make assignments to another attendant console  
1. Scroll to another attendant console (+scrolls forward, - scrolls backward).  
2. Press Escto close the Attendant Console Flexible Button Assignments screen and return  
to the Flexible Key Program Administration screen.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed Dial Programming Section ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Speed Dial Programming Section  
The Speed Dial Programming Section option in the Administration Menu enables you to  
maintain system and station speed dial assignments.  
To access speed dial assignments  
Type d; the System &  
Station Speed Dial  
Administration screen  
displays (shown right).  
System Speed Dial  
Numbers  
To edit system speed dial number  
assignments  
1. Press Enter. The  
System Speed Dial  
Numbers screen  
displays (shown right).  
This screen enables  
you to assign or edit up  
to 800 system speed  
dial numbers for the  
RCTUE/F processor,  
100 for RCTUBA/BB,  
RCTUC/D processors,  
and 40 for TMAU and  
RCTUA processors.  
2. Highlight the System  
Speed Dial No. field and type the speed dial telephone number, including area code, and  
press Enter.  
3. Highlight the System Speed Dial Memo field and enter a description of the speed dial  
number (up to 12 characters). This memo displays on the telephones LCD when the Bin  
Number is selected by an LCD telephone using the MODE 8XXX function (where XXX  
is the speed dial bin number).  
4. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK or F10to save the speed dial  
assignments and return to the System/Station Administration screen.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Speed Dial Programming Section  
Station Speed Dial Numbers  
To edit station speed dial number assignments  
1. Highlight the Station  
Speed Dial Numbers  
option and press  
Enter. The Station  
Speed Dial Numbers  
screen displays (shown  
right).  
Note To make entries or  
edit the Telephone  
Location, Log.  
Port No., Int/DN  
No. and Telephone  
LCD User Name fields, you must access the System/Station Administration screen  
under the System/Station Administration option.  
2. Highlight the Physical  
Port No. field and  
press F7. The Port  
Speed Dial Numbers  
& Memos screen  
displays (shown right).  
3. Highlight the Speed  
Dial Number field for  
the appropriate Speed  
Dial Bin Number.  
Type the telephone  
number(including area  
code) and press  
Enter.  
4. Highlight the Speed Dial Memo field and enter a description of the speed dial number  
(using up to 12 characters). This memo displays on the telephones LCD when the Bin  
Number is selected by an LCD telephone using the MODE 8XXX function (where XXX  
is the speed dial bin number).  
5. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK  
...or  
press F10to save the speed dial assignments and return to the System & Station Speed  
Dial Administration screen  
...or  
press Escto return to the previous menu without saving. A pop-up box appears: Data  
modified. Save modified data?  
Press Enterto save or Nto return to the previous screen without saving.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACD Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
CAUTION! The DKAdmin PC must be connected to the Strata DK to upload any  
changes to this data (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for  
procedures on connecting the DKAdmin PC to a Strata DK).  
6. Press Escto close the System & Station Speed Dial Administration screen and return to  
the Main Menu.  
ACD Administration  
The ACD Administration Section option in the Administration Menu enables you to maintain  
your ACD and ACD Agent programs.  
To access ACD administration  
Type a. The DK Program  
File Selection screen  
displays (shown right).  
ACD Programs  
To edit ACD programs  
1. Press Enter; the ACD  
Programs screen displays  
(shown right). This  
screen enables you to  
edit ACD programs (you  
can edit any program  
with a check mark next  
to it).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ACD Administration  
2. Highlight the program  
number and press F3.  
The Edit Program  
screen displays (shown  
right). The screen  
varies, depending upon  
the program selected.  
Note You can also use  
the Find function  
to quickly move to  
a program by  
typing the first  
digit of the program number. DKAdmin highlights the first program number matching  
the entry.  
3. Highlight the field you wish to change and enter the information. Read only fields do not  
accept entries.  
4. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK, or F10to save the speed dial  
assignments and return to the ACD Programs screen.  
Important! The DKAdmin PC must be connected to the Strata DK to upload any changes to  
this data (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for procedures on  
connecting the DKAdmin PC to a Strata DK).  
5. Press the Esckey to close the ACD Programs screen and return to the DK Program File  
Selection screen.  
To view notes on a program  
Highlight the program and press F5.  
Note You can also use the Find function to move quickly to a program by typing the first  
one or two digits of the program number. The program highlights the first program  
number matching your entry.  
Use the Up/Downarrow keys to scroll the description.  
Press F10to print the description.  
Press Escto return to the ACD Programs screen.  
To use the Strata DK’s program files to edit  
1. Press F2and the DK Code dialog box displays.  
2. Type the DK Code: XXXX, where XXXX is the DK level 1 security code set in Program  
00. The DK System Program File screen displays.  
Note If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communicationsscreen  
displays, follow the troubleshooting steps on the screen and/or refer to Appendix A –  
Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
3. Press F2to select (tag) all Program No. (data) files.  
4. Highlight Yesand press Enter. DKAdmin establishes communications to the Strata DK,  
turns on LED 10 in Program 77-1, and receives data blocks. This information displays on  
the PC screen as it occurs.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACD Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
5. Follow Step 2 ~ Step 4 of “To edit ACD programs” on Page 70.  
ACD Agent Programs  
To edit ACD agent programs  
1. Highlight the ACD  
Agent Programsoption  
and press Enter. The  
ACD Agent Programs  
screen displays (shown  
right). This screen  
enables you to edit  
ACD Agent programs.  
2. Highlight the ACD  
Group Number field  
for the ACD Agent  
you wish to change. Type the new two-digit Group number (01 ~ 08) and press Enter.  
3. Highlight the ACD Agent ID Code field and enter a four-digit ACD Agent ID Code  
Number (0000 ~ 9999). If you type less than four digits, the program zero fills the field.  
Press Enter.  
4. Highlight the ACD Agent Name field. Type the Agent’s name (up to eight characters) and  
press Enter.  
5. Highlight the Auto Answer Assignment. Use the spacebar or +/-keys to toggle between  
Auto Answerand No Auto Answer.  
6. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK, or F10to save the speed dial  
assignments and return to the ACD Programs screen.  
Important! The DKAdmin PC must be connected to the Strata DK to upload any changes to  
this data (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for procedures on  
connecting the DKAdmin PC to a Strata DK).  
7. Press Escto close the ACD Programs screen and return to the DK Program File Selection  
screen.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Program Administration Section  
Program Administration Section  
The Program Administration Section option in the Administration Menu enables you to  
maintain Strata DK programs. This includes pulling the program from the DK, editing the  
program, initializing the Strata DK processor, or sending the program to the Strata DK.  
For complete information on Strata DK programs, including default definitions, refer to the  
Strata DK Programming Manual.  
To access a Strata DK program  
1. Type pand the DK  
Program File Selection  
screen displays (shown  
right).  
2. Highlight the option  
on the screen you wish  
to select and press  
Enter. The selected  
screen displays. See  
Table 4 for a list of  
available programs.  
Table 4  
Available Programs  
Program Title  
Program Title  
Toll Restriction Programs  
View All Programs (Download, Edit, Upload)  
View System Features by Subject  
System Number Plan & Port Locations  
System Wide Option Programs  
Station Options Programs  
Data Interface Unit Programs  
Doorphone/Ext. Paging/BGM/Conference  
LCR Programs  
Multiple Directory Number Programs  
ANI Programs  
Station (Gnd/Loop) CO Line Assignment Programs  
Station Group Programs  
DNIS Programs  
Security/Account/T.R. Ovr. Programs  
Voice Mail Integration Programs  
ACD Programs  
DKT/RPCI/OA Interface Programs  
Class/Caller ID Programs  
Distributed Hunt Programs  
Call Park Programs  
ACD Agent Programs  
DK Auto Attendant Programs  
Attendant Console Programs  
T1 Programs  
Off Hook Call Announce Programs  
Standard Telephone MW/Camp-on Tone Programs  
Enhanced 911/CAMA Trunk Programs  
ISDN Programs  
Ground/Loop Start CO Line Programs  
DID/TIE Line Programs  
Initialization Programs  
IMDU or RMDS Modem/DID/DNIS Assignment  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Program Administration Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
After selecting the program, you have the following options:  
Press F2to pull the program data from the DK. See “Restore Data” on Page 102 for  
procedures on downloading data.  
Press F3to edit the program. Only programs displaying a check mark may be edited  
by your password level. Options for editing programs differ depending on the selected  
program. They may include:  
F2 - Reset Ports  
F2 - Range  
Resets the ports to their original configuration.  
Enter a range to apply a change.  
F9 - Save & Upload  
F10 - Save  
Save the change and upload the data to the DK.  
Save the change in DKAdmin customer database and  
return to the originally selected program screen.  
F10 - Initialize  
Initialize the Strata DK processor with selected  
Program 90, 91, or 92; this does not affect DKAdmin  
customer data files.  
Press F5to view notes on the program.  
Press Escto return to the DK Program File Selection screen. Press Escagain to  
return to the DKAdmin Main Menu.  
View All Programs (Download, Edit, Upload)  
To access the option  
1. From the DK Program  
File Selection screen,  
press Enterand the  
View All Programs  
(Download, Edit,  
Upload) screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. Highlight the desired  
program.  
Note To find a program  
number quickly,  
type the number and the display screen “jumps” to the program number. If the number  
you have typed does not exist, a dialog box displays telling you the number was not  
found.  
To pull the program data from the DK  
Press F2to pull the program data from the DK. See “Restore Data” on Page 102 for  
procedures on downloading data.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Program Administration Section  
To edit a program  
1. Press F3and the  
Directory Numbers  
Assignments screen  
displays (shown right).  
2. Highlight the logical  
port number and press  
F2to reset the DN for  
the logical port  
numbers on a range of  
ports.  
3. A change dialog box  
displays and you must  
enter the starting DN. A pop-up screen displays asking you to confirm the change:  
This operation will modify DN numbers. Go ahead?  
4. Press Enterto change the port numbers.  
5. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK, or F10to save the changes in  
the DKAdmin customer database and return to the DK Program File Selection screen.  
To print programs  
1. Press F4and a printer pop-up dialog box displays. The default printer is checkmarked.  
2. Press Enterto print or highlight another printer and press F2to select.  
3. If a printer is not designated for the selected port, press F2again and a printer list displays.  
Highlight the appropriate printer and press Enter.  
To view notes on a program  
Highlight the program and press F5.  
Note You can also use the Find function to move quickly to a program by typing the first  
one or two digits of the program number. The program highlights the first program  
number matching your entry.  
The following keys can be used when viewing program notes:  
Use the Up/Downarrow keys to scroll the description.  
Press F10to print the description.  
Press Escto return to the ACD Programs screen.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
75  
Program Administration Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
When using DKAdmin, Table 5 provides important information regarding specific  
programs:  
Table 5  
DKAdmin Program List  
Program  
Comment  
Program 03  
On new or upgraded installations, Program 03 should always be checked and  
uploaded to make sure all PCB slots have the correct codes for PCBs and  
PCB options. Strata DK power must be turned off (5-seconds) and then on  
after uploading (restoring) Program 03 to enable its data to take effect.  
Program 04 or 04  
When editing Directory or DN/intercom numbers in Programs 04 or 04,  
DKAdmin checks for duplicate or conflicting numbers and stops them from  
*
*
being entered. When uploading Programs 04 or 04, DKAdmin downloads  
*
them from the processor, compares and arranges the data in an acceptable  
order and uploads it to the Strata DK.  
Program 09 and 76-0  
DKAdmin edits and uploads Programs 09 and 76-0 in the same manner as  
*
*
Programs 04 and 04.  
*
CAUTION! ACD/DID assignments in Program 09 cannot be Restored  
*
(uploaded) with early ROM versions of Strata DK Release 2  
ROMs.  
PRGALL  
Whenever PRGALL is uploaded (restored), Programs 04 and 09 are  
downloaded and checked, then uploaded prior to the PRGALL upload.  
*
Program 38/39  
To change a keystrip from 20 to 10 keys, or from 10 to 20, without changing  
the data in Program 39, select and edit Program 38 using Program  
Administration. To change a keystrip to a default value in Program 38 and  
overwrite Program 39 data, select and edit TELEPHONE KEYSTRIP TYPE  
(PRG38) from the System/Station Administration-PORT ATTRIBUTES screen  
for the selected station port. When changing a keystrip from 20 keys to 10  
keys, DKAdmin stores the pause (code 495) key in key 11~20 (unused keys).  
This is because there is no code for a blank key.  
If using Strata DK Release 2 or lower, you must power off (5 sec)/on the  
Strata DK after sending the changes to the Strata DK from DKAdmin in order  
for the program changes to take effect.  
Program 90, 91, and 92  
All Initialization programs will initialize the data in the Strata DK processor  
(RCTU PCB), not the data in the DKAdmin PC customer files.  
If initializing the system with 91-9 remotely, the customer DK TTY port must  
be connected to a modem that has a direct CO line as shown in Figure A-3 of  
Appendix A.  
REPALL  
These two files will always be Up or Down loaded in pairs when either file is  
Up or Down loaded.  
Program 04, *04, *09, and  
76-0  
Unused ports in these programs will be blanked out when upgrading to an  
RCTU with more port number than the original RCTU. This is done to prevent  
inserting DN and DID number conflicts during an upgrade. For example, if  
upgrading from a RCTUB to and RCTU C/D, ports 80~239 will be blanked out  
in Program 04.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Security Maintenance Section  
Security Maintenance Section  
The Security Maintenance Section option (level 9 password required to access this option)  
enables you to set up to three levels of security using:  
Passwords - defines the functions available to users using menu-specific passwords as  
described on Page 121.  
Program Access - defines the programs which can be used by each password level using  
the Security Maintenance Section option (see “Program Security (Default Levels)” on  
Page 78).  
DK Access Code - must be entered to enable a user to send and/or receive data to/from a  
Strata DK. The default for this code is 0000 and may be changed (but not viewed) by  
DKAdmin users that have an allowable password level.  
To limit the Strata DK programs a user may edit  
1. From the  
Administration Menu,  
type uto display the  
DK Program Security  
Maintenance screen  
(shown right).  
The screen lists the  
Strata DK programs  
available for  
programming or  
updating. You can  
limit programs a user  
can access by  
assigning a security  
level (which corresponds to the users assigned password level).  
Note Program access security limits direct access of programs when using the Program  
Administration Section Option. When using the ACD Administration Section Option,  
only Programs 01, 02, 04, 09, VMID, MWID, and Personal Speed Dial access can be  
*
denied from the normal System/Station Administration functions.  
2. Highlight the S/L field of the desired program. Type the password level (0~ 9,  
9=highest) you want to assign for accessing the program and press Enter.  
Note For a complete list of Password/Program default levels, see “Program Security  
(Default Levels)” on Page 78.  
...or  
to assign all the programs to a particular password level, press F2-reset. A Security Level  
dialog box displays. Type the password level (0~ 9,9=highest) you want to assign to all  
the Strata DK programs and press Enter. A confirmation message displays. Highlight  
Yesand press Enter.  
The Security Level for all programs are changed to the entered password level.  
3. To close the DK Program Security Maintenance screen, press Esc.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
77  
Security Maintenance Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Note The password levels (0 ~ 9) are based on a hierarchal system. This means that  
password level 9 has access to all programs, but password level 5 (for example) has  
access to all programs tagged with 5 and below, but not 6 and above.  
Program Security (Default Levels)  
Program security is maintained by assigning access levels to each program. The access level is  
assigned to each User ID/Password so each User ID/Password can be allowed or denied edit/  
view privileges to selected Strata DK programs. DKAdmin provides default levels for User  
IDs/Passwords and program security (listed below). These passwords and program security  
levels may be added or changed by logging onto DKAdmin with a level 9 (Master) password.  
The default User ID/Password and Program Security levels are shown below:  
User ID  
ADMIN1  
Password  
ADMIN1  
Program Security Level  
2
5
8
9
ADMIN2  
TECH1  
ADMIN2  
TECH1  
MASTER  
MASTER  
Table 6  
Strata DK Program Security  
Strata DK  
Security Level  
Program  
Program Title  
REPALL  
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
8
8
0
0
0
0
0
All Station and System Speed Dial Numbers  
All User Names  
NAMEALL  
VIDALL  
MIDALL  
ADMEMOALL  
MSGALL  
CFALL  
All Voice Mail ID Codes (#656)  
All Voice Mail Message Waiting Codes (#657)  
All Station and System Speed Dial Memos  
All Station and System LCD Messages  
All Call Forward Settings  
MWALL  
CLID  
All Message Waiting Settings  
All Class/ANI Lost Call Number Storage Data  
Cabinet Compatibility (DK424)  
*03  
04  
*
Directory Numbers Assignment (R3)  
Call Park Pickup Access Codes (R3)  
DID Digit Translation  
05  
*
09  
*
10  
*
E911 Assignments (R3.1)  
*11-0  
*11-1  
*11-2  
*11-5  
*11-6  
CAMA Trunk Assignments (R4)  
CAMA Trunk Group Line Assignments (R4)  
CAMA Trunk Group Hunting Assignments (R4)  
CAMA Digit Sent on 911 Calls (R4)  
E911 Interdigital Timer (R4)  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Security Maintenance Section  
Table 6  
Strata DK Program Security (continued)  
Strata DK  
Security Level  
Program  
Program Title  
*11-8  
*12  
0
0
0
5
5
8
8
8
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0
0
0
0
0
911 Special [DN] Notification Assignments (R4)  
ANI Station Information (R4)  
*13  
Station Group Information (R4)  
14-1  
*
Auto Answer with Zip Tone Assigned to Agent ID  
DID/TIE Line After Shift & Overflow Substitution Destination  
CO Line Tenant Assignments  
14-2  
*
15  
*
*16  
ISDN Trunk Group Type Assignments (R4)  
DID Intercept Port Number (Caller Dials Vacant/Wrong Number)  
Add-On Module Button Assignments  
17  
*
29  
*
30  
*
Group Page Assignments  
31  
*
Group Pickup Assignments  
32  
*
Voice Mail Message Center Port (RS-232)  
Phantom DN Owner Assignments (R3)  
Station Class of Service  
33  
*
34  
*
36  
*
Night Transfer Lock Button “Password Change” Station (R3)  
Station Park Recall Timer (R3)  
37  
*
40  
Station Distributed Hunt Group Assignments (R3.1)  
T1 Span Frame and Coding Assignments  
T1 Channel Assignments  
*
41-1  
*
41-2  
*
41-3  
T1 Span Transmit (Send) Level PAD Assignments  
T1 Span Receive Level PAD Assignments  
Primary & Secondary Clock Source Reference Assignments  
‘D’ Channel Control and NFAS Assignment (R4)  
BRI SPID Parameters (R4)  
*
41-4  
*
42-1~2  
*
*43-1~3  
*44  
45-1  
Office Code Toll Restriction (R3.0)  
*
45-2  
Special Numbers that Do Not begin with /# (R3.0)  
*
*
45-3  
Special Numbers that begin with /# (R3.0/R3.1)  
*
*
50  
RCIU/RCIS Port Assignment  
*
51  
Station Caller ID/ANI Lost Call Memory Allocation (R3)  
Common CO Line Caller ID Lost Call Owner (R3)  
BRI Assignment for Line/Station Operation (R4)  
ISDN Station Bearer Service (R4)  
*
52  
*
*60  
*61-1  
*61-2  
*61-3  
*62-1  
ISDN Station Outgoing Call Pad Level (R4)  
ISDN Station Incoming Call Pad Level (R4)  
Non-ISDN Station Bearer Service (R4)  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
79  
Security Maintenance Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Table 6  
Strata DK Program Security (continued)  
Strata DK  
Security Level  
Program  
Program Title  
*62-2  
*62-3  
*63  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
8
8
8
0
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Non-ISDN Station Outgoing Call Pad Level (R4)  
Non-ISDN Station Incoming Call Pad Level (R4)  
ISDN Dialing Parameters (R4)  
*64-1  
*64-2  
*65  
Direct Inward Dialing Parameters (R4)  
Direct Inward Dialing Parameters (R4)  
ISDN Channel Group Assignment (R4)  
Channel Parameters (R4)  
*66-1  
*66-2  
*66-3  
*66-4  
*66-5  
*66-6  
*66-7  
*67-1  
*67-2  
*67-3  
*67-4  
*68-1  
*68-2  
*69-1  
*69-2  
Call-by-Call Trunk Group Codes (R4)  
Channel Group Parameters (R4)  
Call-by-Call Network ID (R4)  
Line Directory Number (LDN) Registration (R4)  
Line Directory Number (LDN) Channel Groups (R4)  
Line Directory Number (LDN) Trunk Groups (R4)  
Trunk Group Parameters (R4)  
Call Types for ISDN Trunk Group Supported (R4)  
Call Types for ISDN Trunk Groups (R4)  
Call Types for ISDN Trunk Groups (R4  
Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters (R4)  
Outbound Calling Number ID Presentation Parameters (R4)  
CNIS Presentation Parameters (R4)  
Special Number Assignment (R4)  
71  
*
Ringing DN Assignment for Immediate Ring (R3)  
Ringing DN Assignment for Delay 1 Ring (R3)  
Ringing DN Assignment for Delay 2 Ring (R3)  
Doorphone Ring LED Assignments (R3)  
Call Forward Ringing Assignments (R3.2)  
DN LED Display Assignment (DAY Mode) (R3)  
DN LED Display Assignment (DAY2 Mode) (R3)  
DN LED Display Assignment (NIGHT Mode) (R3)  
Software Check/Remote Password Assignments  
Logical Station Ports  
72  
*
73  
*
79  
*
*80  
81  
*
84  
*
87  
*
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
Physical Station Ports  
Flexible PCB Cabinet and Slot Assignments  
Logical Port Intercom Number Assignments  
Flexible Access Code Numbering  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Security Maintenance Section  
Table 6  
Strata DK Program Security (continued)  
Strata DK  
Security Level  
Program  
Program Title  
09  
8
8
8
8
5
5
8
8
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
5
5
8
5
Auto Attendant Prompt/Station Assignments  
System Assignments  
10-1  
10-2  
10-3  
10-4  
11  
System Assignments  
System Assignments  
ACD Parameters  
ACD Timing Assignments  
12  
System Assignments - Basic Timing  
Defining the Message Center  
13  
14-0  
14-1  
14-2  
14-3  
14-4  
14-5  
14-6  
14-71  
14-72  
14-73  
14-8  
14-9  
15  
ACD CO Line Assignments  
ACD Agent Identification Code Assignments  
ACD Supervisor Passwords  
Announcement/Music Port Assignments  
Overall Queue Time Out Destination  
Overflow Operation/Destination Assignments  
End of Shift Service Destination  
Queue Size for Alarm (Immediate)  
Queue Size for Alarm 1 (Timed)  
Queue Time for Alarm 2 (Timed)  
Alarm Pattern Assignments  
Stroke Count Assignments  
Assigning DP/DTMF, Tenant Service To Individual CO Line  
Assign CO Line Groups (Dial 9 or 001~816)  
DID/TIE Line Options  
16  
17  
18  
Agent ID Code Name for MIS Assignments  
Alternate Background Music (BGM) Slot Identification  
DIgital Data Port Configuration  
19  
20  
21  
Modem Pool Port Assignments  
22  
Data Interface Unit (DIU) Station Hunting (Data Calls Only)  
Primary Auto Attendant Announcement Device Assignments  
Secondary Auto Attendant Announcement Device Assignments  
Incoming Auto Attendant Call Overflow Time  
Built-In Auto Attendant Camp-On Busy Time  
Digital Telephone Handset Receiver Volume Level  
DSS Console/Attendant Telephone Assignments  
DSS Console Button Assignments  
23  
24  
25-1  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
81  
Security Maintenance Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Table 6  
Strata DK Program Security (continued)  
Strata DK  
Security Level  
Program  
Program Title  
30  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
5
5
5
8
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Station Class of Service  
31  
Station Class of Service  
Automatic Preference  
32  
33  
Station Hunting (Voice Calls Only)  
Hold/Park Recall Timing  
34  
35  
Station Class of Service  
36  
Fixed Call Forward (Voice Calls Only)  
CO and TIE Line Ring Transfer (Camp-on) Recall Time  
Digital and Electronic Telephone Keystrip Type  
Flexible Key Assignment Button Codes  
Station CO Line Access  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
Station Outgoing Call Restriction  
42-0  
42-1~8  
43  
CO Line to PBX/Centrex Connection  
PBX/Centrex Access Code  
Station/CO Line Credit Card Call Allowed  
Toll Restriction Class Traveling Class Override Code  
Emergency Bypass of Forced, Verified Account Codes  
LCR/Toll Restriction Dial Plan  
44-1~8  
44-91~93  
45-1  
45-2  
45-3~6  
45-8~9  
46-10~80  
46-11~81  
46-2~4  
46-6~8  
47  
Toll Restriction Disable  
Special Common Carrier (SPCC) and Auth. Code Digital Length  
Toll Restriction Override Code  
Toll Restriction Class Parameters  
Toll Restriction Class Parameters  
Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Area Codes by Class  
Toll Restriction Allowed/Denied Office Codes by Class  
Toll Restriction Exception Office Codes by Area Code  
Station Toll Restriction Classification  
LCR Parameters  
48  
50-1  
50-2  
50-31~35  
50-4  
50-5  
50-6  
51  
LCR Home Area Code  
LCR Special Code  
LCR Long Distance Information (LDI) Plan Number  
LCR Local Plan Number  
LCR Dial Zero Timeout  
LCR Area Codes  
52  
LCR Office Code Exceptions for Specified Area Codes  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Security Maintenance Section  
Table 6  
Strata DK Program Security (continued)  
Strata DK  
Security Level  
Program  
Program Title  
53  
8
8
8
5
5
5
5
5
5
8
5
5
5
5
8
0
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
LCR Schedule Assignments for LCR Plans  
LCR Route Definition Tables  
54  
55-0~2  
56  
LCR Modified Digits Tables  
LCR Station Group Assignments  
58-1  
58-2  
58-4  
58-5  
59  
Attendant Console Overflow Timer  
Attendant Console Display Type  
Attendant Console Answer Key Priority Assignments  
Attendant Console Overflow Destination Assignments  
Attendant Console Flexible Button Codes  
SMDR Printout data of CLASS/ANI/DNIS or Account Code  
SMDR Output/Account Code Digit-Length  
Call Forward External (Remote Change, Security) ID Code  
Verified Account Codes  
60-1  
60-2~7  
60-8  
69  
70  
Verified Account Code Toll Restriction Assignments  
DNIS Number Assignments (R3)  
70-0  
71-0  
71-1  
71-2  
71-3  
71-4  
71-5  
72  
DNIS Number Assignments  
DNIS Ringing Point Assignments (DAY Mode) (R3)  
DNIS Ringing Point Assignments (DAY2 Mode) (R3)  
DNIS Ringing Point Assignments (NIGHT Mode) (R3)  
DNIS Voice Mail ID Assignments (R3)  
DNIS Name Tag Assignments (R3)  
DNIS Network Table (R3)  
74  
Night Transfer Lock Button Password(s) (R3)  
Interface Port Type & Transmission Speed (R3)  
Peripheral Options (Door Phones/IMDU/PIOU/PIOUS/PEPU/RM  
Door Phone Busy Signal/Door Lock Assignments  
Night Ringing Over Tenant External Page Zones  
Open Architecture Interface Attributes (R3.2)  
CO Line Special Ringing Assignments: DSS/IMDU, Night Ringing  
Door Phone Ringing  
76-1~2  
77-1  
77-2  
77-3  
77-4  
78  
79  
80  
Digital & Electronic Telephone Ringing Tones (CO Line Calls)  
CO Line/Station Ringing Assignments (DAY Immediate)  
CO Line/Station Ringing Assignments (DAY 12-Second Delay)  
CO/Line/Station Ringing Assignments (DAY 24-Second Delay)  
CO/Line/Station Ringing Assignments (DAY 2 Immediate)  
81  
82  
83  
84  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
83  
Security Maintenance Section –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Table 6  
Strata DK Program Security (continued)  
Strata DK  
Security Level  
Program  
Program Title  
85  
5
5
5
5
5
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
5
5
CO/Line/Station Ringing Assignments (DAY 2 12-Second Delay)  
CO/Line/Station Ringing Assignments (DAY 2 24-Second Delay)  
CO/Line/Station Ringing Assignments (NIGHT Immediate)  
CO/Line/Station Ringing Assignments (NIGHT 12-Second Delay)  
CO/Line/Station Ringing Assignments (NIGHT 24-Second Delay)  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
Initializing Program 00~ 99  
*
91-1  
91-2  
91-9  
92-1  
92-2  
92-3  
92-4  
92-5  
92-9  
93  
Automatic PCB Recognition/Port Renumber  
System Power Off/On Simulation  
System Initialization  
Initialize Station Speed Dial Numbers & Memos, VM ID Codes  
Initialize System Speed Dial Numbers & Memos  
Initialize Station & System User Name/Number Display  
Initialize Timed Reminders  
Initialize Phone/Ring Vol., Tone/BGM, Busy Override, etc.  
Initialize Call Forward Memory  
CO Line Identification  
97  
Printing Program Through SMDR  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Directory Number Administration  
Directory Number Administration  
Note This option cannot be used by Strata DK Release 2 or below.  
To maintain your directory number assignments for both your PDNs and PhDNs  
1. Press rand the  
Directory Number  
Administration screen  
displays (shown right).  
This screen enables you  
to assign and change  
PDN and PhDN user  
names, call forward ID  
codes and message  
waiting ID codes. You  
can also assign or edit  
DNIS detail features  
such as immediate ring,  
key numbers and delays.  
Note The first column on the screen displays a P for a PDN and an F for PhDN.  
2. Highlight the PDN/PhDN No. field of the desired port number.  
Note You can also use the Find feature by moving the highlighter to the Port No. field, and  
typing a port number.  
3. Type a [PDN] or [PhDN], and press Enter. If there is a DN/Port conflict with the entered  
number, an error message displays: Conflict Found in Int./DN Numbering  
If this message appears, retype the number and press Enter  
...or  
to change the PDN/PhDN numbers for a range of ports, highlight the PDN/PhDN No. field  
and press F5. A pop-up box displays.  
Type the desired starting [DN] number for your PDN ports (000-079) and press  
Enter.  
Type the desired starting [DN] number for your PhDN ports (500-579) and press  
Enter.  
A message displays: This operation will modify DN numbers. Go  
ahead?  
Press Enterto change all the PDNs/PhDNs or press Escto leave the screen without  
making the change.  
4. Highlight the PDN/PhDN Owner User Name field and enter the name assigned to the  
station (up to 16 characters).  
5. Highlight the Voice Mail Call Forward ID Code field and type an applicable call forward  
ID code (up to 16 characters). Press Enter  
...or  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
85  
Directory Number Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
to change the range of numbers used for all the ports, press F5. A pop-up box displays,  
enabling you to specify a range of numbers.  
Type the desired range of Port Reference Numbers for the PDNs (000 ~ 079).  
Type the desired range of Port Reference Numbers for the PhDNs (500 ~ 579).  
Type a Voice Mail CF Prefix (up to four characters) and press Enter. A message  
displays: All ports will be reset to default values. Go  
ahead?  
Press Enterto set/change all Call Forward IDs.  
6. Highlight the Voice Mail Message Waiting ID Code field and enter an applicable message  
waiting ID code (up to 16 characters)  
...or  
to change the range of numbers used for all your ports, press F5. A pop-up box displays,  
enabling you to specify a range of numbers.  
Type the desired Port Reference Number for the PDNs (000 ~ 079).  
Type the desired Port Reference Number for the PhDNs (500-579).  
Type a Voice Mail MW Prefix (up to four characters) and press Enter. A message  
displays: All ports will be reset to default values. Go  
ahead?  
Press Enterto set/change all Message Waiting IDs.  
7. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK, or F10to save the assignments  
and return to the Main Menu.  
To set or change detailed information for the PDNs/PhDNs  
1. From the Directory Number Administration screen, highlight the DN you wish to edit and  
press F2. The Directory Number Administration screen for the selected DN number  
displays.  
This screen (shown  
right) enables you to  
turn on or off an  
immediate ring, or a  
12- or 24-second delay  
ring. You can also  
access your ringing  
lines and flexible keys  
from this screen.  
2. Highlight the Imm.  
Ring field for the  
desired DN. The  
spacebar toggles the  
field between enabled  
and disabled. When the field is enabled a check mark is displayed in the field.  
3. Highlight the 12s Dly field for the desired DN. The spacebar toggles the field between  
enabled and disabled. When the field is enabled a check mark is displayed in the field and  
a 12-second delay before ringing occurs.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Directory Number Administration  
4. Highlight the 24s Dly field for the desired DN. The spacebar toggles the field between  
enabled and disabled. When the field is enabled a check mark is displayed in the field and  
a 24-second delay before ringing occurs.  
Note You cannot enable both the 12s Dly field and the 24s Dly field. Enabling either field,  
automatically disables the other.  
To specify your ringing options  
1. From the Directory  
Number  
Administration for  
Primary DN XXX  
screen, highlight the  
desired DN number  
and press F2. The  
Directory Number CO  
Line Ringing  
Assignment screen for  
the selected DN  
displays (shown right).  
For each of your CO  
lines, you can set/  
change the following options for your day, day 2 and night operations:  
Immediate ring  
12- or 24-second ring delay  
Specified DN LED to flash during a ring.  
2. Highlight the DAY Imm. Ring field for the desired CO Line. The spacebar toggles the  
field between enabled and disabled. When the field is enabled a check mark is displayed in  
the field and DAY immediate ring occurs.  
3. Highlight the 12s Dly field for the desired CO line. The spacebar toggles the field between  
enabled and disabled. When the field is enabled a checkmark is displayed in the field and  
a 12-second delay before ringing occurs.  
4. Highlight the 24s Dly field for the desired CO line. The spacebar toggles the field between  
enabled and disabled. When the field is enabled a checkmark is displayed in the field and  
a 24-second delay before ringing occurs.  
Note You cannot enable both the 12s Dly field and the 24s Dly field. Enabling either field,  
automatically disables the other.  
5. Highlight the 81 LED field and press F6or Enter. A pop-up box displays with your  
*
available choices. Highlight the [DN] LED you want to flash during a day ring and press  
Enter.  
6. Highlight the DAY2 Imm Rng and NITE Imm Rng fields and repeat Steps 2 ~ 5.  
7. Press F10to save you entries and return to the Directory Number Administration screen.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
87  
Directory Number Administration –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To set/change CO Line flexible key assignments  
1. From the Directory  
Number for Primary  
DN XXX screen,  
highlight a [DN] and  
press F5. The Flexible  
Key Assignments  
screen for the selected  
Port/DN displays  
(shown right).  
2. Highlight the desired  
Flexible Key  
Assignment and:  
Press F2to change  
the assignment from a CO line to the PDN.  
Press F3to change the assignment to the SDN. A pop-up dialog box displays. Type  
the [PDN]/[SDN] (0000 ~ 9999) you wish to assign and press Enter.  
Press F4to change the assignment to a PhDN. A pop-up dialog box displays. Type the  
[PhDN] (0000 ~ 9999) you wish to assign and press Enter.  
Press F5to deactivate or blank out a key assignment.  
Press F6to display a pop-up dialog box showing the available key assignments.  
Highlight the desired assignment and press Enter.  
Press F8to add multiple speed dial key assignments.  
Important! You can only use this key when you are assigning more than one speed dial key at  
a time. If you have not just added a speed dial key assignment, the message Must  
Assign System/Station Speed Dial Firstdisplays.  
If you leave the cursor in the same field and continue to press F8, the speed dial  
key number increments. To add consecutive speed dial key assignments, you must  
continue to highlight the next field before pressing F8.  
3. Press F10to save the entries and return to the Directory Number Administration (detail)  
screen.  
4. Press F10to save your programs and return to the main Directory Number Administration  
screen.  
5. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the Strata DK, or F10to save the  
assignments and return to the Main Menu.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DNIS Administration  
DNIS Administration  
Note This option cannot be used by Strata DK Release 2 or below.  
This option enables you to maintain assignments for your DNIS/DID/ANI lines, change or add  
number/name/ringing/voice mail ID assignments, or network tables and tenant locks  
specifications.  
To access the option  
Type n. The DNIS  
Administration screen  
displays (shown right).  
DNIS/DID/ANI Line Assignments  
To set/change your DNIS/DID/ANI line assignments  
1. Press Enterand the DNIS/DID/ANI Line Assignments screen displays.  
This screen (shown  
right) enables you to  
set/change options for  
the following items:  
Use of page and  
voice  
announcements on  
an incoming tie  
line  
Tie/DID wink start  
status  
DID line camp-on  
status  
Second dial tone status  
Specify DNIS or DID line  
Specify ANI or DNIS priority  
Support (or not) ANI features  
Use (or not) ANI feature key  
*
2. Highlight the field of the tie/DID line with which you wish to work.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
DNIS Administration ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Note Each field has only two selections. Use the spacebar or +/- keys to toggle between  
them.  
Field  
Selection  
Tie Line  
Page & Voice/No Page & Voice  
Voice & Page  
Tie/DID  
Immediate/Wink Start  
Wind/Immed  
DID Line  
Camp On Busy  
Auto Camp-on/No Camp-on  
Second Tone/No Second Tone  
DID/Tie Line  
Second Dial Line  
3. Repeat Step 2 for each tie/DID line you wish to set/change.  
4. Press F10to save your entries and return to the DNIS Administration screen.  
DNIS Number/Name/Ringing/VM-ID Assignments  
To set/change the DNIS address reference numbers  
1. Highlight the DNIS Number/Name/Ringing/VM-ID Assignments option and press  
Enter. The DNIS Number/Name/Ringing/VM-ID Assignments screen displays (shown  
below).  
The following items for each of the DNIS address reference numbers can be set/changed:  
DNIS number  
DNIS name  
Day ringing point  
Day 2 ringing point  
Night ringing point  
DNIS Voice Mail ID  
number  
Note To blank out any  
entry in these fields,  
highlight the field  
and press F4.  
2. Highlight the DNIS No. field of the DNIS address with which you wish to work.  
3. Enter the DNIS number, using 2 ~ 5 characters  
...or  
to enter a range for all your DNIS addresses, press F5. A pop-up dialog box displays. Type  
the DNIS address range in the From and To fields and a starting DNIS number. Press  
Enter.  
4. Highlight the DNIS Name field and type a DNIS name, using up to 16 characters. Press  
Enter.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DNIS Administration  
5. Highlight the DAY Ring field and enter the desired DAY ringing point.  
Press F2to review the Ringing Point Identification codes.  
Press F6to select a ringing point. Highlight the ringing point you wish to assign and  
press Enter.  
6. Highlight the DAY2 Ring field and repeat Step 5.  
7. Highlight the NIGHT Ring field and repeat Step 5.  
8. Highlight the DNIS Voice Mail ID Number field and type a DNIS Voice Mail ID Number,  
using up to 16 characters and press Enter  
...or  
to enter a range for all your DNIS addresses, press F5. A pop-up dialog box displays. Type  
the starting voice mail ID number and press Enter. A message displays:  
All ports will be reset to default values. Go ahead?  
9. Press Enterto reset the default values or Escto exit without resetting.  
10. Press F10to save your entries and return to the DNIS Administration screen.  
DNIS Network Table Assignments  
To set/change CO line access codes and network telephone numbers  
1. Select the DNIS Network Table Assignments option and press Enter. The DNIS  
Network Table Assignments screen displays.  
This screen (shown  
right) enables you to  
set/change CO line  
access codes and  
network telephone  
numbers so that DNIS  
calls can be routed  
externally over the  
public telephone  
network.  
2. Highlight the CO Line  
Access Code and  
Network Telephone  
Number field for the  
DNIS Network Table Reference number with which you wish to work.  
3. Type the CO line access code and network telephone number, using up to 27 digits and  
press Enter. To remove an entry, with the field highlighted, press F4.  
4. Press F10to save your entries and return to the DNIS Administration screen.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Distributed Hunt Group Administration ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DNIS Tenant Lock Assignments  
To set/change passwords for station port numbers  
1. Select the DNIS Tenant Lock Assignments option and press Enter. The DNIS Tenant  
Night Lock Assignments screen displays.  
This screen (shown  
right) enables you to  
set/change passwords  
for station port  
numbers for each of  
your DNIS tenant  
night numbers.  
2. Highlight the Current  
Password field of the  
Tenant number with  
which you wish to  
work.  
3. Type the password,  
using up to four digits and press Enter.  
4. Highlight the Set Password Station Port field and type the set password station port  
number (1 ~ 3 digits) and press Enter.  
5. Press F10to save your entries and return to the DNIS Administration screen.  
6. Press Escto return to the Main Menu. Your files are saved and a message displayed:  
Upload modified programs to DK now?  
7. Press Enterto return to the Main Menu without uploading the information or highlight  
Yesand press Enterto upload the files.  
Distributed Hunt Group Administration  
Note This option cannot be used by Strata DK Release 3 or below.  
To maintain your distributed hunt group assignments (up to 32)  
1. Type h. The  
Distributed Hunt  
Group Primary  
Directory Number  
Hunt-To Assignments  
screen displays (shown  
right).  
2. Highlight the DH  
Group DN No. field of  
the Distributed Hunt  
Group number with  
which you wish to  
work.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Call Forward Assignments  
3. Type a DH Group [DN] (up to four digits) and press Enter. If the entered number  
conflicts with a DN/Port already assigned, an error message displays.  
4. Highlight the Hunt PDN 01 field. Type the hunt [PDN] number and press Enter  
...or  
press F6to select the number from a table. Highlight the desired number and press  
Enter.  
5. Repeat Step 4 for each Hunt PDN field.  
Note The Hunt PDN fields scroll once you reach the far right column. You can continue to  
access Hunt PDNs using the right arrow key.  
6. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK, or F10to save the assignments  
and return to the Main Menu.  
To display and update your DNIS/DID Ringing assignments for a hunt group  
Press F2and the DNIS/DID Line Ringing Assignments screen displays. See “To specify  
your ringing options” on Page 87 for procedures on working with this screen.  
To display and update your CO Line Ringing assignments for a hunt group  
Press F3and the CO Line Ringing Assignments screen displays. See “To specify your  
ringing options” on Page 87 for procedures on working with this screen.  
Call Forward Assignments  
Note This option cannot be used by Strata DK Release 2 or below.  
To set/change the call forward assignments  
1. Type w. The System  
Directory Number Call  
Forward Assignments  
screen displays (shown  
right).  
2. Highlight the Upload  
field for the desired  
port number. To select  
a port number  
assignment for  
uploading to the DK,  
press the spacebar. A  
check mark ()  
displays next to the  
port number. To de-select the item for upload, press the spacebar again.  
3. Highlight the Call Forward To DN field and type the [DN] to call forward to and press  
Enter  
...or  
press F6to select the [DN] from a table. Highlight the desired number and press Enter.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only) –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
4. Highlight the next Call Forward Type field. A default value (All, Busy, No Answer, Busy/  
No Answer) is entered in this field based on your selection in Step 3. To change the  
assignment, press +/-to toggle the selections and press Enter.  
5. Highlight the Call Forward Timer field. A default value is entered in this field based on  
your selection in Step 3. To change the assignment, type the number of seconds (08-60)  
you wish to apply before the call forward executes for “No Answer” or “Busy/No  
Answer” conditions. Press Enter.  
6. Press F4to cancel a call forward assignment for a port.  
7. Press F8to save the entries and upload the selected data to the Strata DK, or F9to save  
the entries and upload all the data to the Strata DK, or F10to save the assignments and  
return to the Main Menu.  
Important! If CF is set for a PDN using DKAdmin, the CF Button does not light unless the  
Strata DK power is turned off (five seconds) and then on.  
To use the Strata DK’s program files to edit  
1. Press F2and the DK Code dialog box displays.  
2. Type the DK Code: XXXX, where XXXX is the Strata DK level 1 security code set in  
Program 00. The DK System Program File screen displays.  
Note If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communicationsscreen  
displays, follow the troubleshooting steps on the screen and/or refer to Appendix A to  
correct the problem.  
3. Press F2to select (tag) all Program No. (data) files.  
4. Highlight YESand press Enter. DKAdmin establishes communications to the Strata DK,  
turns on LED 10 in Program 77-1, and receives data blocks. This information displays on  
the PC screen as it occurs.  
5. Follow Step 2 ~ Step 4 of “To edit ACD programs” on Page 70.  
Note For more information on downloading DK information, refer to the procedures in  
Chapter 7 – Backup Menu (DKBackup).  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only)  
Note Programs *11~*13 cannot be used by Strata DK Release 3 or earlier.  
The E911/CAMA Trunk Programs option in the Administration Menu enables you to maintain  
E911 and Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk programs.  
Program 10 provides two assignable RSTU, KSTU2, RDSU, PSTU, or PESU ports to  
*
interface with Central Office (CO) E911 trunks. This program is only used when CAMA  
trunks are connected to an E911 adjunct interface box, not when using Toshiba RMCU/RCMS  
CAMA trunks.  
E911 enhanced operation provides locator information (i.e., more complete name and address  
information, including building, floor, etc.) to the responding agency. This is done by sending  
the station number of the 911 caller to the E911 emergency center. This locator information is  
then cross-referenced with name/number/address data in the E911 central database, and the  
E911 operator receives the precise location along with the basic information.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only)  
The Strata DK16e and DK424 accomplishes this with a special interface between the KSU and  
the CO. This special interface takes the station number information and sends it through the  
public network in a format compatible with the central E911 database. This special interface is  
required in addition to sending software within the Strata DK16e and DK424. The required  
interface is an external device (Telident or Proctor) that interfaces with up to two analog  
station ports.  
Programs 10-11 and 10-12 assign which RSTU, KSTU2, RDSU, PSTU, or PESU standard  
*
*
telephone ports are connected to the E911 interface unit. Program 04 Directory Number data  
must be blank for E911 RSTU-KSTU2 ports.  
Program 10-91 assigns the time allowed to dial each digit after dialing 9 when using the E911  
*
feature. This time will affect the time that LCR or CO Line dial tone is returned when dialing  
9. However, a user can dial a 9+ (non-911) calls normally before receiving LCR or CO line  
dial tone and the DK will route the call appropriately.  
Program 10-92 assigns the time the DK will wait before sending the Station [PDN] to the  
*
E911 SLT port after the E911 SLT port answers.  
To access E911/CAMA Trunk Programs using RMCU/RCMS CAMA trunks  
From the  
Administration Menu,  
type 9. The E911/  
CAMA Trunk  
Programs screen  
displays (shown right).  
To edit E911/CAMA trunk programs  
1. Highlight the program number and press F3. The Edit Program screen displays. The  
screen varies, depending upon the program selected.  
Note You can also use the Find function to quickly move to a program by typing the first  
digit of the program number. DKAdmin highlights the first program number matching  
the entry.  
2. Highlight the field you wish to change and enter the information. Read only fields do not  
accept entries.  
3. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK, or F10to save the E911/  
CAMA trunk assignments and return to the E911/CAMA Trunk Programs screen.  
Important! The DKAdmin PC must be connected to the Strata DK to upload any changes to  
this data (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for procedures on  
connecting the DKAdmin PC to a Strata DK).  
4. Press the Esckey to close the E911/CAMA Trunk Programs screen and return to the  
Administration Menu.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only) –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To use the Strata DK’s program files to edit  
1. Press F2and the DK Code dialog box displays.  
2. Type the DK Code: XXXX, where XXXX is the DK level 1 security code set in Program  
00. The DK System Program File screen displays.  
Note If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communicationsscreen  
displays, follow the troubleshooting steps on the screen and/or refer to Appendix A –  
Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
3. Press F2to select (tag) all Program No. (data) files.  
4. Highlight Yesand press Enter. DKAdmin establishes communications to the Strata DK,  
turns on LED 10 in Program 77-1, and receives data blocks. This information displays on  
the PC screen as it occurs.  
5. Follow Step 2 ~ Step 4 of “To edit E911/CAMA trunk programs” above.  
To view notes on a program  
Highlight the program and press F5.  
Note You can also use the Find function to move quickly to a program by typing the first  
one or two digits of the program number. The program highlights the first program  
number matching your entry.  
Use the Up/Downarrow keys to scroll the description.  
Press F10to print the description.  
Press Escto return to the E911/CAMA Trunk Programs screen.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– ISDN Programs (R4 Only)  
ISDN Programs (R4 Only)  
Note This option cannot be used by Strata DK Release 3 or earlier.  
The Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Programs option in the Administration Menu  
enables you to maintain ISDN programs.  
Release 4.0 provides the Primary Rate Interface (PRI) ISDN capabilities. Release 4.1/4.2 will  
introduce the ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI). PRI features apply to the following Release 4  
processors: RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D4, and RCTUE3/F4. Like T1, ISDN PRI is not  
supported on the RCTUA4 small system processor.  
To access ISDN Programs  
From the  
Administration Menu,  
type i. The ISDN  
Programs screen  
displays (shown right).  
To edit ISDN programs  
1. Highlight the program number and press F3. The Edit Program screen displays. The  
screen varies, depending upon the program selected.  
Note You can also use the Find function to quickly move to a program by typing the first  
digit of the program number. DKAdmin highlights the first program number matching  
the entry.  
2. Highlight the field you wish to change and enter the information. Read only fields do not  
accept entries.  
3. Press F9to save the entries and upload the data to the DK, or F10to save the ISDN  
assignments and return to the ISDN Programs screen.  
Important! The DKAdmin PC must be connected to the Strata DK to upload any changes to  
this data (see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for procedures on  
connecting the DKAdmin PC to a Strata DK).  
4. Press the Esckey to close the ISDN Programs screen and return to the Administration  
Menu.  
To use the Strata DK’s program files to edit  
1. Press F2and the DK Code dialog box displays.  
2. Type the DK Code: XXXX, where XXXX is the DK level 1 security code set in Program  
00. The DK System Program File screen displays.  
Administration Menu (DKAdmin)  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backup/Restore Data –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Note If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communicationsscreen  
displays, follow the troubleshooting steps on the screen and/or refer to Appendix A –  
Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
3. Press F2to select (tag) all Program No. (data) files.  
4. Highlight Yesand press Enter. DKAdmin establishes communications to the Strata DK,  
turns on LED 10 in Program 77-1, and receives data blocks. This information displays on  
the PC screen as it occurs.  
5. Follow Step 2 ~ Step 4 of “To edit ISDN programs” on Page 97.  
To view notes on a program  
Highlight the program and press F5.  
Note You can also use the Find function to move quickly to a program by typing the first  
one or two digits of the program number. The program highlights the first program  
number matching your entry.  
Use the Up/Downarrow keys to scroll the description.  
Press F10to print the description.  
Press Escto return to the ISDN Programs screen.  
Backup/Restore Data  
For the Backup/Restore Data option, see “Backup Data” on Page 100 and see “Restore Data”  
on Page 102.  
View/Print Data  
For the View/Print Data option, see “View/Print Data” on Page 115.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
7
Note The Backup Menu is only available in the DKBackup program. The Check Processor  
Type, Backup/Restore Data, and View/Print Data appear in both the DKBackup  
Backup Menu and the DKAdmin Administration Menu. These functions are identical  
(e.g., screens, operations, commands, etc.) whether you use DKAdmin or DKBackup.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup makes backing up and restoring Strata DK programs quick and easy  
and saves valuable time and labor when upgrading Strata DK software. You may use this  
function to:  
Download all customer data from a programmed Strata DK to the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
PC.  
Upload and restore an updated customer database from the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC to  
your customer’s Strata DK.  
Upgrade data from a Strata DK processor to a new higher level processor.  
View/print customer program ASCII files.  
Notes  
When you create a new customer record using the Maintain Customer File option,  
DKAdmin/DKBackup creates a new PC disk directory, XXX.DK, and places the specified  
files into this directory.  
XXX = the customer directory which is named when creating a new customer, using the  
Maintain Customer File option in the File Menu.  
The .DK extension is automatically added by DKAdmin/DKBackup when creating the  
directory in DOS.  
The Strata DK programming telephone (station 205 or 213) cannot be in the programming  
mode when backing up or restoring Strata DK program files.  
Anytime PRGALL is restored to a Strata DK, system power must be turned OFF (3  
seconds) and then ON. This is required to make Programs 03, 29, 39, 59, and 41~2 take  
*
*
effect in Strata DK Release 2. It is only required for Programs 03, 76-1, 41-2, and 50 in  
Strata DK Release 3~Release 4.  
*
*
Do not use Backup Data (F3) or Restore Data (F4) to upgrade processors.  
When upgrading processors, Primary, Phantom, and Distributed Hunt Group default  
[DNs] that are not on the original processor are blanked out on the new processor to  
prevent [DN] conflicts. This includes default data in Programs 04, *04, *09, and 71-0.  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Check Processor Type –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Check Processor Type  
To check processor type  
1. Select a customer using the Select Customer option in the File Menu.  
2. From the Administration Menu/Backup Menu, press cto display a pop-up dialog box.  
3. Enter the four-digit DK Code. The default is 0000. This is the “first level password” which  
is set in the Strata DK Program 00. The code does not display as you type it.  
4. DKAdmin/DKBackup pulls Program 00 and displays the processor type, ROM/Flash  
version and release numbers, along with the same information of the selected customer  
database. Verify that the displayed information is the same as the processor installed in the  
DK system.  
Notes  
If the PC and Strata DK do not communicate, the Problem: Unable to Establish  
Communications screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen and/or see  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
Make sure the programming telephone (station 205 or 213) is not in the programming  
mode.  
Backup Data  
Prior to backing up  
1. Select a customer using the Select Customer option in the File Menu.  
Note Before you can select the customer, you must use the Maintain Customer File option  
to create a customer.  
2. Establish a communications path between the PC (running DKAdmin/DKBackup) and the  
Strata DK using the Dial DK option or by making a direct connection to the Strata DK (see  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK).  
3. After connecting the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC to the Strata DK, select the Administration  
Menu/Backup Menu and run the Check Processor Type option to verify that the customer  
file format is the same as the installed Strata DK processor. When checking the processor,  
you must enter the DK code programmed on the installed processor.  
Important! Make sure the processor type, ROM/Flash release number (1~4) are the same as  
the customer database you are backing up. Release 3 and 4.X are considered the  
same for backing up and restoring databases.  
If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communications screen displays, follow the steps on  
the screen and/or see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
To back up (download) a customer’s database  
1. After checking the processor type, select the Administration Menu/Backup Menu and type  
b. The DK Code dialog displays.  
2. Enter the four-digit DK Code (if prompted to do so).  
Important! You must enter the code that is programmed on the installed processor.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Backup Data  
The DK System Program File screen displays listing the available data for backup (see  
screen in Step 3). For security, this code does not display on screen as you type it. The  
default code is 0000. This is the “1st level password” which is set in the Strata DK  
Program 00 (see the record sheet for Program 00 in the Strata DK Programming Manual).  
Note If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communications screen displays, follow the  
troubleshooting steps on the screen and/or see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK  
to correct the problem.  
3. Highlight the program file you wish to back up (download) and press the spacebar to tag  
(checkmark) the program file (shown below). Repeat this step for as many program files  
as you wish to back up. Press F2to tag all program files (see Note “The DK System  
Program File...” on Page 102).  
DK System Program File  
Program No.  
PRGALL  
REPALL  
NAMEALL  
VIDALL  
MIDALL  
ADMEMOAL  
MSGALL  
CFALL  
Program Title  
All System Programs  
All Station and System Speed Dial Numbers  
All User Names  
All Voice Mail ID Codes (#656)  
All Voice Mail Message Waiting Codes (#657)  
All Station and System Speed Dial Memos  
All Station and System LCD Messages  
Directory Number Call Forwarding settings (R3)  
Message Waiting Lamp settings (R3)  
Caller ID/ANI Lost Call telephone numbers (R3)  
MWALL  
CLID  
F1-Help SPACE-(Un)Tag F2-(Un)Tag All F3-Backup F4-Restore F5-Upgrade  
Esc-Exit  
Select If Marked  
4. After selecting the programs, press F3. The screen prompts with the message “You  
will receive data from the DK. Are you sure?”  
5. Highlight Yesand press Enter.  
6. DKAdmin/DKBackup prompts you to enter the DK Code again. When the correct code is  
entered, DKAdmin/DKBackup turns on LED10 in Program 77-1 and then downloads all  
files selected in Step 3. The screen displays Download Completewhen finished.  
7. Press Esctwice and select the next desired function.  
Notes  
When you back up PRGALL, the DK security code set in the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
customer database, is not sent to the processor. You must always enter the DK security  
code that is actually programmed on the processor installed in the Strata DK. You can  
change the DK security code using the DKAdmin Program Administration Section option  
or manually using the programming telephone.  
Access to the DK Code should be considered highly confidential and only given to those  
individuals with the security level which enables them to program or update DK data. If  
changing the Strata DK Program 00 Passwords, always change both Level 1 and 2 for  
security. DKAdmin/DKBackup checks both codes and runs with either code.  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restore Data ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
The DK System Program File list is displayed (see Step 3 on Page 101). If this screen does  
not display, the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and the Strata DK are not communicating. See  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK for procedures to connect the PC COM port to the  
Strata DK PIOU, RSSU, RSIS, RSIU, or PIOUS TTY port, or IMDU or RMDS modems.  
Important! If the PC screen does not display prompts such as Turning on LED 10,  
Program 77-1, XXX:LOGGING IN, etc., the PC and Strata DK are not  
communicating. When operating properly, DKAdmin/DKBackup logs off and on  
in between each program file it restores. If a communication failure exists, see  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK. If the communication path between the  
PC and Strata DK is broken during Backup or Restore operations, it may be  
necessary to go in and out of the Program mode from the programming telephone  
(Station 205); or turn the Strata DK power off and on to resume communications.  
Restore Data  
Prior to restoring data  
1. Select a customer using the Select Customer option in the File Menu.  
This should be the customer database which has been created or previously backed up  
using DKAdmin/DKBackup. This customer database must be the same DK Release  
(e.g., 1, 2, 3, or 4.X) and processor type to which you are restoring data.  
Although DK16e is considered Release 1, it contains the Release 3 features of RCTUA3  
with the exception of Distributed Hunt.  
Note Release 3 data can be restored to Release 3.X data and vice versa.  
2. Establish communications between the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and the Strata DK using  
the Dial DK option or by making a direct connection (see Appendix A – Connecting to  
Strata DK).  
3. After connecting to the Strata DK, select the Administration Menu/Backup Menu and run  
the Check Processor Type option to verify that the customer file format is the same as the  
installed Strata DK processor.  
Important! Make sure the processor type, ROM/Flash release number is the same as the  
customer database you are restoring.  
If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communications screen displays, follow the steps on  
the screen and/or see Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
To restore (upload) a customer’s database  
1. After checking the processor type, select the Administration Menu/Backup Menu and type  
b. The DK Code dialog displays.  
2. Enter the four-digit DK Code (if prompted to do so).  
Important! You must enter the code that is programmed on the installed processor.  
For security, this code does not display on screen as you type it. The default code is 0000.  
This is the “1st level password” which is set in the Strata DK system Program 00 (see the  
record sheet for Program 00 in the Strata DK Programming Manual).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Restore Data  
Notes  
When you back up PRGALL, the DK security code, set in the DKBackup customer  
database, is not sent to the processor. You must always enter the DK security code that is  
actually programmed on the processor installed in the Strata DK. You can change the DK  
security code using the DKAdmin Program Administration Section option or manually  
using the programming telephone.  
Access to the DK Code should be considered highly confidential and only given to those  
individuals with the security level which enables them to program or update DK data. If  
changing the Strata DK Program 00 Passwords, always change both Level 1 and 2 for  
security. DKAdmin/DKBackup checks both codes and run with either code.  
After you enter the DK Code, the computer will display the DK System Program File list  
is displayed (see screen in Step 3 below). If this screen does not display, the DKAdmin/  
DKBackup PC and the Strata DK are not communicating. See Appendix A – Connecting  
to Strata DK to verify that the PC COM port is connected to the Strata DK PIOU, RSSU,  
RSIS, RSIU or PIOUS TTY port, or IMDU or RMDS modems.  
Make sure the programming telephone (station 205 or 213) is not in the programming  
mode if communications are not established.  
3. After entering the DK code, the following screen displays.  
DK System Program File  
PRGALL  
REPALL  
NAMEALL  
VIDALL  
MIDALL  
ADMEMOAL  
MSGALL  
CFAALL  
MWALL  
All System Programs  
All Station and System Speed Dial Numbers  
All User Names  
All Voice Mail ID Codes (#656)  
All Voice Mail Message Waiting Codes (#657)  
All Station and System Speed Dial Memos  
All Station and System LCD Messages  
Directory Number Call Forwarding settings (R3)  
All Message Waiting Settings (R3)  
All Class/ANI Lost Call Number Storage Data (R3)  
CLID  
Note If the PC and Strata DK do not communicate, the Problem: Unable to Establish  
Communications screen appears. Follow the instructions on the screen and/or see  
Appendix A – Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
4. Highlight the program file you wish to restore and press the spacebar to tag (checkmark)  
the program file. Repeat this step for as many program files as you wish to restore. Press  
F2to tag all files.  
CAUTION! Do not restore the PRGALL file while the system is in use. Restoring the file,  
interrupts service by blanking out [DNs] temporarily.  
5. After selecting the files, press F4. The pop-up window shown below displays. If you are  
changing ROMs/Flash Memory or PCBs, follow the instructions on the screens to add or  
change PCBs and reset the Strata DK communications port.  
If you are changing from a PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU to a RSIU or RSIS, you are able to  
increase the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC COM port baud rate (for example, from 1200 to  
9600).  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restore Data ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Important! These messages display  
Processor Conversion  
PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING SCREENS AS THEY PROVIDE VERY IMPORTANT  
INFORMATION REGARDING THE UPGRADE AND INITIALIZATION PROCESSES.  
Please turn DK system power off and add/change cabinets, processor ROM or  
RMSS memory and/or RCTU PCBs as required.  
IMPORTANT: Do not add PCBs, other than RSIU or PIOU in between existing  
PCBs at this time as they will make station port and/or CO line numbers  
shift causing the upgraded data to be invalid.  
The next screen provides step-by-step instructions for initializing the  
system.  
Press any key to Continue  
6. Press Enterand the following screen displays:  
Processor Conversion  
Step A:After changing the processor, you should initialize the new  
processor by running Program 91-9 manually from the Programming  
Telephone. Then you must reset the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU/  
RSIS/RMDS TTY port that is connected to DKAdmin PC by performing  
Step B and/or C.  
Step B:From the Programming Telephone, use Program 03 to set code 41 for  
the cabinet slot that contains the new TTY/Maintenance PIOU,  
PIOUS, or RSSU PCB and proceed to Step D. If you added an RSIU/  
RSIS/RMDS PCB, set code 49 for cabinet slot 11 and proceed to Step  
C.  
Step C:From the Programming Telephone, use Program 76-1 and 76-2 to set  
the RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports for their appropriate functions and baud  
rates. DKAdmin will pull Program 76 and adjust the DKAdmin  
customer database accordingly. Make sure the TTY/Maintenance port  
settings are correct to insure a successful Upgrade process.  
Proceed to Step D.  
Step D:Turn DK off (5 sec) then on. From the Programming Telephone, test  
the RCTU (R3) RAM by running Program 00-(51,52/61, 62)  
Press any key to Continue  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Restore Data  
7. After completing the steps on the screen, press Enter(twice) and the Baud Rate  
Selection screen displays (shown below). This screen enables you to set the DKAdmin/  
DKBackup PC COM port baud rate which must match the baud rate of the TTY or modem  
port set by the programming telephone.  
Baud Rate Selection  
Please adjust the baud rate of DKBackup PC COM port to match the new  
PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU or RSIU/RSIS you may have installed.  
Baud Rate ...............  
9600  
300  
1200  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
38400  
57600  
8. Select the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC COM port baud rate and press Enter. The  
information screen below instructs you to pull Program 03 if you changed any PCBs  
during the Restore process. DKAdmin/DKBackup enables you to pull Program 03  
automatically.  
Note If you are connected to the customer system, always have DKAdmin/DKBackup pull  
Program 03 when restoring data. If you are restoring data to an RCTU that is installed  
in a test system that is not loaded with the same PCBs as the customer database, do not  
pull Program 03 at this time.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup will then download Program 03 and Program 76 to ensure a  
successful restore process.  
Processor Conversion  
If you added or changed any PCBs other than the RCTU PCB in the DK system,  
the customer database will need to be updated to reflect these changes.  
You can pull Program 03 from the DK to accomplish this.  
If you pull Program 03 from the DK, you will override the existing  
customer database with the DK data.  
If you do not pull Program 03 from the DK, the existing customer database  
will remain intact.  
IMPORTANT: If you have upgraded the customer database offline, DO NOT pull  
Program 03 as it will override your changes.  
IMPORTANT: Any time DK14/DK16e/DK40 is upgraded, Program 03 must be  
pulled so DKAdmin can update the new system’s cabinet drawing.  
NOTE: If you pull Program 03 from the DK, the DK will be initialized with  
Program 91-1 automatically. This initialization program identifies the  
PCBs to the DK.  
Press any key to Continue  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Restore Data ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
9. After reading the screen in Step 7, press Enter. The screen below displays.  
DK System Program File  
Program No.  
PRGALL  
Program Title  
All System Programs  
REPALL  
NAMEALL  
VIDALL  
All Station and System Speed Dial Numbers  
All User Names  
All Voice Mail ID Codes (#656)  
Pull Program 03 from DK to Update Customer Database?  
Yes  
No  
10. Highlight Yesand press Enter. You are prompted for the DK Code.  
11. Enter the four-digit DK Code.  
Important! You must enter the code programmed on the installed processor.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup turns on LED10 in Program 77-1 and then displays the message  
You will send data to the DK. Are you sure?”  
12. Highlight Yesand press Enter. You are prompted for the DK Code.  
13. Enter the four-digit DK code.  
Important! You must enter the code programmed on the installed processor.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup begins the Restore process. After restoring data, the message  
Upload Complete!displays  
Note Before restoring data, DKAdmin/DKBackup pulls some programs (04, 04 and 09)  
*
*
to arrange the data and prevent numbering conflicts.  
14. Press Enterfrom the Process Complete screen. The information screen below displays.  
You have uploaded program(s) to the DK which require  
the DK to be powered off for 5 seconds and then on  
again for the modifications to take effect.  
DK280 Release 3 and 4 allows you to perform this task  
automatically without physically turning the system  
off. If desired, the system can be shut down manu-  
ally.  
15. Turn the system off (five seconds) and then on, or highlight Yeswhen you are prompted  
with the message Perform automatic power OFF/ON simulation?  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Upgrade  
16. Press Enterfrom the screen above. DKAdmin/DKBackup runs Program 91-2 and then  
displays the message Program 91-2 has been completed. The system  
has performed a power off/on simulation.  
17. After the above screen displays, press any key. The restore process has been completed.  
You may use the Esckey to exit to the top menu.  
Important!  
If you restore (send) PRGALL to the Strata DK, the DK security code that is programmed  
on the installed processor is not changed. You may change the DK security code using the  
DKAdmin Program Administration Section option or manually from the programming  
telephone.  
When uploading Program 35 or PRGALL, DKAdmin will pull MSGALL and ADMEMOAL  
to update any changes in Program 35, LED 05.  
Upgrade  
Upgrading a Customer’s Processor  
See “Maintain Customer File” on Page 36 for information on upgrading a customer’s  
processor.  
Strata DK Processor PCB Upgrade  
You can upgrade processors and keep an old database using the Backup/Restore Data option.  
Upgrades may be made as follows:  
DK14 to: DK16e, DK40, or any RCTU Release 3 or higher.  
DK16e, DK40 to: RCTUA3, RCTUA4, RCTUBA3/BB3, RCTUBA3/BB4, RCTUC3/D3,  
RCTUC3/D4, RCTUE3/F3, or RCTUE3/F4.  
RCTUA to: RCTUB, RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, RCTUA3 or RCTUA4.  
RCTUB or B2 to: RCTUC/D, RCTUE/F, RCTUBA3/BB3, or RCTUBA3/BB4.  
RCTUC/D2 to: RCTUE/F, RCTUC3/D3 or RCTUC3/D4.  
RCTUE3/F3 to: RCTUE3/F4  
Important! DK14, DK16e, and DK40, Release 1 software is identical (e.g., features,  
programs, etc.) to DK280/DK424 RCTUA3 or Release 3.0. You can, therefore,  
only upgrade DK14, DK16e or DK40 to an RCTU processor with Release 3.0 or  
higher software. DK14 can be also upgraded to DK16e and DK40. DK16e can  
interchangeably upload and download with DK40 databases and vice versa.  
Notes  
It is not possible to go from a RCTUC/D to a RCTUA or RCTUB, from a RCTUB to  
RCTUA, etc., or from Release 4 back to Release 1~Release 3.  
In this procedure, the word “original” describes the existing processor and “new”  
describes the upgraded processor.  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrade ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
When upgrading from an RCTU Release 1 or 2 to an RCTU Release 3 or above,  
DKAdmin/DKBackup automatically converts Program 39 intercom code (000) to the  
appropriate Primary Directory Number code (##XXX) for each station port.  
When upgrading from DK16e and RCTUA to RCTUB or C/D (all releases), System  
Speed Dial numbers and buttons (060~099) are upgraded to (660~699).  
When upgrading to an RCTUE/F, station and system speed dial numbers *60~*99,  
*600~*699, and *10~*39 will be converted to *200~*999 and *100~*139 appropriately.  
When upgrading from RCTUB to RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F (all releases), the Program 09  
ACD Port assignments (090~097) are upgraded to (250~257) for RCTUC/D or (870~885)  
for RCTUE/F.  
*
When upgrading from RCTU Release 1 or 2 to RCTU Release 3 or above, Program 04  
and 71-0 are blanked out to insure that [PhDN], Distributed Hunt [DNs], and DNIS default  
values do not conflict with existing [DNs] (Program 04) and DID numbers (Program  
*
*
09). All [DNs] not programmed on the original processor in Programs 04, *04, *09, and  
71-0 are also blanked out on the new processor to prevent numbering conflicts.  
When upgrading from RCTUA to RCTUB, RCTUC/D or RCTUE/F (all releases), the  
RCTUA Program 09 IMDU/RMDS Port 035 is upgraded to Port 085 (RCTUB), Port  
*
245 (RCTUC/D) or Port 340 (RCTUE/F); or, if upgraded from RCTUB to RCTUC/D or  
RCTUE/F (all releases), Program 09 IMDS/RMDS Port 085 is upgraded to Port 245  
*
(RCTUC/D) or Port 340 (RCTUE/F).  
To upgrade the processor  
1. Select the Customer using the Select Customer option in the File Menu.  
Notes  
If a customer database does not exist for the processor (original) that you are upgrading  
from, go to the Maintain Customer File option and create a customer, selecting the  
“original” processor and the original software release; then answer Yesto the question  
Backup From DK Firstduring the upgrade process.  
Before upgrading, use the Backup option to backup the original processor database to the  
designated customer so you can go back to the original processor type, if necessary. Then  
create a new customer for the upgrade database, selecting the original processor release  
and processor type. The upgrade process converts the original processor database to the  
new processor database.  
2. Establish a connection between the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and the Strata DK TTY port  
- the original processor should be installed in the Strata DK.  
Important! On-site upgrades should be completed when the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC COM  
port is connected directly to the Strata DK (per Appendix A – Connecting to  
Strata DK, Figure A-1), not while the system is in use or through modems.  
However, you can backup the customer database remotely via modems and then  
upgrade the database to another RCTU in your office. After the RCTU is  
upgraded in your office, you can install it in the customers DK.  
3. After making a direct connection between the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and the DK, use  
the Check Processor Type option under the Administration Menu/Backup Menu to verify  
that the installed (original) processor is the same type and software release as the selected  
customer file.  
Important! When checking the processor type, you must enter the DK security code that is  
programmed on the processor you are checking.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Upgrade  
If the following message displays: Problem: Unable to Establish  
Communications, follow the steps on the screen and/or refer to Appendix A –  
Connecting to Strata DK to correct the problem.  
4. From the Administration Menu/Backup Menu, type b. The DK Code dialog box displays.  
5. Enter the four-digit DK Code that is programmed on the installed processor. The DK  
System Program File screen displays as shown below. For security, this code does not  
display on screen as you type it. The default code is 0000. This is the “1st level password”  
which is set in the Strata DK Program 00 (see the record sheet for Program 00 in the Strata  
DK Programming Manual).  
If the Problem: Unable to Establish Communications screen displays (shown below),  
check the items listed on the screen and/or refer to Appendix A – Connecting to Strata  
DK.  
DK System Program File  
Program No.  
PRGALL  
REPALL  
NAMEALL  
VIDALL  
MIDALL  
ADMEMOAL  
MSGALL  
CFALL  
Program Title  
All System Programs  
All Station and System Speed Dial Numbers  
All User Names  
All Voice Mail ID Codes (#656)  
All Voice Mail Message Waiting Codes (#657)  
All Station and System Speed Dial Memos  
All Station and System LCD Messages  
Directory Number Call Forwarding settings (R3)  
Message Waiting Lamp settings (R3)  
Caller ID/ANI Lost Call telephone numbers (R3)  
MWALL  
CLID  
F1-Help SPACE-(Un)Tag F2-(Un)Tag All F3-Backup F4-Restore F5-Upgrade  
Esc-Exit  
Select If Marked  
6. Press F5(Upgrade). The screen below provides instructions regarding Program 03.  
Processor Conversion  
Note:  
After the data are upgraded, the new data will be sent to the DK. You  
will then need to modify Program 03 and upload to the DK.  
7. Press the spacebar to display the screen below (this is an sample upgrade RCTU-CD to  
RCTU-EF Release 3 or Release 3.10).  
Processor Conversion  
Processor Currently in Use: DK, RCTU-CD, R3  
Processor to Upgrade to: DK, RCTU-EF, R3  
Backup From DK First: Yes  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrade ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
8. Press Enterand then select the processor type you are upgrading to; press Enterafter  
selecting the processor (RDTU E/F, Release 3 in this example).  
9. If you haven’t backed up the customer database by downloading the original RCTU,  
answer Yesto Backup From DK First; otherwise, answer No. Press the spacebar to  
make your selection and then press Enter.  
10. From the screen in Step 7 above, use the spacebar to change Backup From DK First  
from Noto Yesto download the database from the original processor and press Enter.  
Note If you already completed a backup and have a spare customer database for the original  
processor, you can answer Noto the prompt: Backup from DK First.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup upgrades the database files and displays the screen shown in  
Step 13. Steps 11 and 12 are skipped.  
You are prompted with the message Upgrading to DK RCTU EF, R3. Are you  
sure?This database is then upgraded before sending it to the “new” processor  
11. Use the arrow keys to highlight Yesand press Enter. You are now prompted with You  
will receive data FROM the DK. Are you sure?  
12. Highlight Yesand press Enter. DKAdmin/DKBackup downloads the following files:  
PRGALL, REPALL, NAMEALL, VIDALL, ADMEMOAL, MSGALL, CFALL  
(Release 3), MWALL (Release 3), CLID (Release 3). DKAdmin/DKBackup then  
upgrades and builds the database. After upgrading the database, the screen in Step 13  
displays.  
13. At this point DKAdmin/DKBackup has upgraded the customer database; follow the  
instructions on the screens below to change ROMs/Flash Memory on processors and add  
cabinets and PCBs as required.  
Important! Remember to turn power off before changing PCBs and cabinets. Then turn the  
system back on and perform the steps on the screen below to ensure the  
DKBackup and DK system TTY port communication link continues to function  
during the remaining upgrade process.  
Processor Conversion  
PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING SCREENS AS THEY PROVIDE VERY IMPORTANT  
INFORMATION REGARDING THE UPGRADE AND INITIALIZATION PROCESSES.  
Please turn DK system power off and add/change cabinets, processor ROM or  
RMSS memory and/or RCTU PCBs as required.  
IMPORTANT: Do not add PCBs, other than RSIU or PIOU in between existing  
PCBs at this time as they will make station port and/or CO line numbers  
shift causing the upgraded data to be invalid.  
The next screen provides step-by-step instructions for initializing the  
system.  
Press any key to Continue  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Upgrade  
14. Press Enterand the following screen displays:  
Processor Conversion  
Step A:After changing the processor, you should initialize the new  
processor by running Program 91-9 manually from the Programming  
Telephone. Then you must reset the PIOU, PIOUS, RSSU, or RSIU/  
RSIS/RMDS TTY port that is connected to DKAdmin PC by performing  
Step B and/or C.  
Step B:From the Programming Telephone, use Program 03 to set code 41 for  
the cabinet slot that contains the new TTY/Maintenance PIOU,  
PIOUS, or RSSU PCB and proceed to Step D. If you added an RSIU/  
RSIS/RMDS PCB, set code 49 for cabinet slot 11 and proceed to Step  
C.  
Step C:From the Programming Telephone, use Program 76-1 and 76-2 to set  
the RSIU/RSIS/RMDS ports for their appropriate functions and baud  
rates. DKAdmin will pull Program 76 and adjust the DKAdmin  
customer database accordingly. Make sure the TTY/Maintenance port  
settings are correct to insure a successful Upgrade process.  
Proceed to Step D.  
Step D:Turn DK off (5 sec) then on. From the Programming Telephone, test  
the RCTU (R3) RAM by running Program 00-(51,52/61, 62)  
Press any key to Continue  
15. Press Enter(twice) after completing the Steps above. The Baud Rate Selection screen  
displays (shown below). This screen enables you to set the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC  
COM port baud rate which must match the baud rate of the TTY port set by the  
programming telephone in Program 76 (if upgrading TTY port to RSIU).  
Baud Rate Selection  
Please adjust the baud rate of DKBackup PC COM port to match the new PIOU,  
PIOUS, RSSU or RSIU/RSIS you may have installed.  
Baud Rate .............  
9600  
300  
1200  
2400  
4800  
9600  
14400  
19200  
38400  
57600  
Note This Step enables you to switch the TTY port from a PIOU (1200 bps) to an RSIU  
(9600 bps) TTY port to complete the upgrade process faster.  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrade ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
16. Select the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC COM port baud rate and press Enter. The  
information screen below instructs you to pull Program 03 if you changed any PCBs  
during the upgrade process. DKAdmin/DKBackup can be used to pull Program 03  
automatically.  
Processor Conversion  
If you added or changed any PCBs other than the RCTU PCB in the DK system,  
the customer database will need to be updated to reflect these changes.  
You can pull Program 03 from the DK to accomplish this.  
If you pull Program 03 from the DK, you will override the existing  
customer database with the DK data.  
If you do not pull Program 03 from the DK, the existing customer database  
will remain intact.  
IMPORTANT: If you have upgraded the customer database offline, DO NOT pull  
Program 03 as it will override your changes.  
IMPORTANT: Any time DK14/DK16e/DK40 is upgraded, Program 03 must be  
pulled so DKAdmin can update the new system’s cabinet drawing.  
NOTE: If you pull Program 03 from the DK, the DK will be initialized with  
Program 91-1 automatically. This initialization program identifies the  
PCBs to the DK.  
Press any key to Continue  
17. After reading the screen above, press Enter. The program displays:  
Pull Program 03 from DK to Update Customer Database?  
Note If upgrading onsite and the new RCTU is in the customer’s DK, it is recommended  
that you answer Yes. This will cause DKAdmin/DKBackup to pull Program 03 to  
ensure that the upgrade process is successful. If the RCTU you are upgrading is  
installed in a test system (offsite), answer No. Program 03 will not be pulled and  
Program 03 data in the customer database (in DKAdmin) is sent to the new processor.  
18. Highlight Yesor Noand press Enter. You are prompted to enter the DK code.  
19. Enter the default DK Code 0000. DKAdmin/DKBackup initializes the processor with  
Program 91-1, and downloads Programs 03 (if Yes in Step 18) and 76. The program  
displays the message: You will send data to the DK. Are you sure?  
20. Highlight Yesand press Enter. You are prompted to re-enter the DK Code.  
21. Enter the default DK code 0000. DKAdmin/DKBackup begins the upgrade process.  
Note Before restoring/upgrading data, DKAdmin/DKBackup pulls some programs (04,  
04 and 09) in order to arrange the data and prevent numbering conflicts. The DK  
then sends the upgraded database to the new processor.  
*
*
22. After sending the upgraded data to the new processor, the screen below displays. Read the  
screen and press Enter.  
You have uploaded program(s) to the DK which require the DK to be powered  
off for 5 seconds and then on again for the modifications to take effect.  
DK280 Release 3 and 4 allows you to perform this task automatically  
without physically turning the system off. If desired, the system can be  
shut down manually.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Upgrade  
Note For Release 2, only the following message displays: Turn the system OFF (5  
sec).  
23. Turn the system off (five seconds) and then on.  
...or  
When the screen displays the message Perform Automatic Power OFF/ON  
Simulation?, highlight Yes(Release 3 or Release 4 upgrades only).  
24. Press Enterand DKAdmin/DKBackup runs Program 91-2 and displays the screen below  
(Release 3 or Release 4 upgrades only).  
Program 91-2 has been completed.  
The system has performed a power off/on simulation.  
25. Press any key. The upload part of the upgrade process has been completed.  
26. Press the spacebar; the following message displays: To complete the upgrade  
process, you will receive data?  
27. Highlight Yesand press Enterand you are prompted for the DK Code. It is necessary to  
download the upgraded processor database to complete the upgrade process.  
28. Type the default DK Code 0000. DKAdmin/DKBackup downloads the upgraded database  
and saves it under the customer directory. When complete, the Processor Conversion  
screen displays (shown below).  
Processor Conversion  
Conversion Completed Successfully.  
Program 03 may have been updated by the conversion process. This process  
only updates the installed PCBs but not the piggyback options. You must  
edit and upload Program 03 if such changes are required.  
Program 76 may have been reset to ensure that the communication link  
between DKBackup PC and the Strata DK RSIU/RSIS/RMDS TTY port remains at  
the same baud rate. Check and adjust each RSIU/RSIS/RMDS port as  
required.  
If you upgraded a Release 2 System with ACD to Release 3 system with ACD,  
you must perform the steps below for proper ACD operation:  
1. Remove all ACD CO line and Pooled line buttons from Agent phones  
(PRG39).  
2. Add a single appearing PhDN (ACD Call Button) to all Agent phones  
(PRG39).  
3. Program each Agent ACD Call Button PhDN to ring at the Agent phone  
(PRG 71).  
*
4. Program each Agent phone as the owner of its ACD call button PhDN  
(PRG 33).  
*
29. Perform the steps displayed on the screen as required, using the programming telephone,  
and backup any data that you change, using DKAdmin/DKBackup.  
30. Press Esctwice to return to the Main Menu.  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrade ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Important!  
When using DKAdmin/DKBackup, the following list provides important information regarding  
specific programs:  
Program 00: DKAdmin/DKBackup does not upgrade the DK security codes in Program  
00-1 and 00-2. If required, change the code using the DKAdmin Program Administration  
Section option or manually from the programming telephone.  
Program 03: On new or upgraded installations, Program 03 should always be checked  
and updated using DKAdmin Program Administration Section option or manually from  
the programming telephone to make sure all PCB slots have the correct codes for PCBs  
and PCB options. Strata DK power must be turned off (five seconds) and then on after  
uploading (restoring) Program 03 to enable its data to take effect.  
Programs 04, *04 and *09: When uploading these programs, DKAdmin/DKBackup  
downloads them from the processor, compares and arranges data in an acceptable order  
and uploads the data to the Strata DK.  
When upgrading processors, [DNs] that are not programmed or do not exist on the  
original processor in Programs 04, *04, *09, and 71-0, are blanked out on the new  
processor. For example, when upgrading from Release 2 to Release 3, all [PhDNs] are  
blank on the new Release 3 processor. This is necessary to prevent numbering conflicts.  
CAUTION! ACD/DID assignments in Program 09 cannot be restored (uploaded) with  
*
early ROM versions of Strata DK Release 2 ROMs; they must be restored  
using the programming telephone. ROM, RCA-6K(RCTUC/D2) and  
RBA-6H(RCTUB2) and later, and Flash Memory versions provide the ACD/  
DID assignments (Program 09) restore function.  
*
Strata DK Release 3 Added Features: Strata DK Release 3 enables you to backup and restore  
Station Call Forward and Message Waiting status. However, when you upgrade from Strata  
DK Release 1 or 2 to Release 3, Call Forward and Message Waiting data are lost.  
When upgrading from Strata DK, Release 3 to Release 3.10 or higher, station Call Forward,  
Message Waiting, and Lost ANI/Caller ID data are saved and restored from the original  
processor to the new processor.  
CLID: To restore lost call number data, stations must have memory allocated in Program 51.  
*
Important! When backing up or upgrading Strata DK Release 1 Processors: The original  
release of Strata DK software version RCA-3U, 3X or 3Z; RBA-X3F (Release 1,  
June 1, 1993) stores station memory files (REPALL, MSGALL, VIDALL,  
MIDALL, ADMEMOAL, and NAMEALL) in a list format which uses a large  
amount of the PCs memory and takes a long time to back up and restore.  
Toshiba recommends using an MS-DOS edit program to edit out all lines of  
backed-up data (in each file) that do not contain actual speed dial numbers, user  
names, etc. This should be done before restoring the customer database. This  
editing process will not be necessary when backup/restore is used with Strata DK  
software versions following the original June 1, 1993 release. Release 1 ROM,  
RCA-4A (Released September 1, 1993) and later, and Flash Memory versions  
store data in a compressed format and do not require the file editing.  
Release 1 processors (shipped between June 1993 and August 1993) may fail  
during the download process. It may be necessary to download individual files  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– View/Print Data  
one at a time (for example: PRGALL), instead of tagging all files to download. If  
a Release 1 processor fails during the downloading process, retry the process or  
change the original Release 1 processor ROMs to NANP Release 1 upgrade  
ROMs and then download.  
View/Print Data  
To access the option  
1. From the File Menu, select a customer.  
2. From the Administration  
Menu, type v. The View/  
Print Reports screen  
displays (shown right).  
Note If you attempt to  
choose this option  
before you select a  
customer, a message  
Please select  
a customer  
firstdisplays.  
To view and print a customer  
program  
1. Highlight the program/files you wish to view and press the spacebar to select them. To  
select all the programs/files, press F2.  
2. Press Enterto view the program. The program data is displayed in the ASCII format  
required for uploading/downloading the Strata DK. This data can be useful to personnel  
that have knowledge of Strata DK program records.  
3. Press F4to print selected data (remember to press the spacebar to select the file to print).  
4. Press Escto return to the Report screen.  
To print a customer program  
1. Highlight the program/files you wish to print and press the spacebar to select them. To  
select all the programs/files, press F2.  
2. Press F4to print the program(s). The Printer Selection screen displays (with the default  
printer highlighted).  
3. Change the printer destination (by pressing F2to select the printer, then F2again to  
display the list of printers to select from) or press Enterto accept the default printer and  
print the report.  
4. The program data is printed out in the Strata DK ASCII format required to upload/  
download the Strata DK. This data may be useful to personnel that have knowledge of  
Strata DK program records.  
Backup Menu (DKBackup)  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View/Print Data ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options Menu  
8
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions on using the options available on the Options  
Menu. They are:  
System Installation  
Company General Information (DKAdmin only)  
Screen Type/Color Installation  
Printer Type Selection  
System Miscellaneous Variables  
User Password Level Setup  
Communications Setup  
System Utilities  
ReIndex Files  
System Installation  
These features enable you to change system parameters such as screen colors, printer,  
miscellaneous system variables, user password setup and communications setups.  
Company General Information  
This option appears only on the DKAdmin — Option Menu and is not applicable to these  
programs.  
Options Menu  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Installation –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Screen Type/Color Installation  
To change your monitor or color setups (not available to password level 2)  
1. From the Main Menu, type o. The  
System Installation Submenu  
displays (shown right). Press  
Enter.  
2. Type sand a pop-up screen  
displays (shown right), enabling  
you to set monitor and screen  
specifications.  
Note Press the spacebar to toggle between available options.  
Screen Mode  
This option enables you to increase or decrease the screen  
display text size. Select 25, 43 or 50 lines. After making a  
selection, press Enter.  
Color/Monochrome  
Reset Colors  
Select the appropriate option (Color or Monochrome) for  
the type of monitor you are using and press Enter.  
Select Yesor Noand press Enter. If you select Yes,  
any custom colors you have chosen in the Change Colors  
option revert to the default colors.  
Change Colors  
If you do not want to change the display screen colors,  
toggle the Change Colors option to Noand press Enter.  
The pop-up closes and the System Installation Submenu  
displays.  
If you would like to customize your screen display, follow  
the instructions in “To change the color of an item”.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System Installation  
To change the color of an item  
1. From the pop-up dialog box, highlight the Yesfor the Change Colors option and press  
Enter. The Color Selection screen displays.  
The Color Selection  
screen (shown right)  
consists of an item  
selection menu, a set  
of item color bars, and  
a sample screen  
display showing the  
result of your color  
selection. All three  
components work  
together to show an  
example of your screen  
selection. As you  
select an item and  
change its color, the sample screen changes to reflect your new color selection.  
You can change the color of the following screen items:  
Menu Screen  
Data Title  
Menu Background  
Menu Items  
Data Special (Special Text)  
Browse Background  
Data Border  
Browse Item  
Data Screen (Text)  
Data Select (Selected Text)  
Data Unselect (Unselected Text)  
Attention Background (error messages)  
Attention Select (error message item selected)  
2. Use the Enterkey to choose the item you want to change from the Item Selector Menu at  
the left side of the screen. As you move the highlighter down the Item Selector Menu, the  
appropriate color bar is selected.  
3. Use the up/down arrow keys to change the color on the color bar. Notice that as you move  
along the color bar, the sample screen changes to reflect the color selected.  
4. When you have completed all of your color selections, press the Esckey. A Save  
Changes pop-up window displays.  
5. To save your color selections, press Enter. The system returns to the System Installation  
Submenu and is displayed in the colors that you have specified.  
Printer Type Selection  
The Printer Type Selection option enables you to specify the printer you will be using to print.  
Options Menu  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Installation –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To select printer  
1. Type p. The Printout  
Destination Selection  
Matrix screen displays  
(shown right).  
2. Highlight the  
appropriate printer  
destination and press  
the spacebar. The  
highlighter moves to  
the Printer field.  
3. Press F2. The  
Available Printer  
Drivers dialog box  
displays.  
4. Scroll the printer list using the up/down arrow keys, or type the first letter of your printer  
to “jump” to the printer selections which begin with that letter. For example, if you have a  
Hewlett-Packard Laserjet printer, type hand the screen scrolls to the beginning of the  
Hewlett-Packard printers.  
5. Highlight your selection and press Enter. The Printout Destination Selection Matrix  
screen displays again.  
6. Press Enterand the System Installation Submenu displays.  
System Miscellaneous Variables  
The System Miscellaneous Variables option (available to password levels 8 and 9) enables you  
to control various system functions and conventions by changing the default entry.  
To change system variables  
1. Type m. The System  
Miscellaneous  
Variables pop-up  
displays (shown right).  
2. Use the Enteror up/  
down arrow keys to  
move from field to  
field. Press the  
spacebar to toggle  
between Yesand No.  
Confirm Entries  
Bell On  
When set to No, as you complete an input field (using  
all the available field characters), the cursor  
automatically moves to the next field. When set to Yes,  
you must press the Enterkey after field input to move  
to the next field.  
When set to Yes, as you complete all the available  
characters of an input field, a beep sounds.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System Installation  
Proper Case Conversion  
Shift-Function Keys  
Select Yesto have text appear in proper - upper/lower  
case. Select Noto have text appear in all capital letters.  
To build up to 10 function keys which can hold a  
specified text entry in memory, such as a name, date, or  
address, type Yesand press Enter. A pop-up window  
displays (shown below) where you may designate the  
entries.  
In this example, each time that you want to insert the  
date, press Shift+F2and the date is inserted. Press  
Shift+F3and “John Smith” is inserted.  
Background Char  
Change the screen background to a desired shading  
(five settings available).  
3. When you have completed your selections, press Enter. A Save Parameters pop-up box  
displays.  
4. Press Enterto save the entries and return to the System Installation Submenu.  
User Password Level Setup  
The User Password Level Setup option (available to password level 9) enables you to control  
access to certain DKAdmin/DKBackup features through the assignment of menu-specific  
passwords. For example, you can restrict users from backup and restore functions, or security  
assignment features. By assigning the correct password level, these options will not be  
available for selection.  
To access the user password level setup option  
1. From the Main Menu,  
type oand press Enter  
to select the System  
Installation option.  
2. Type uand the Password  
File Maintenance screen  
displays (shown right).  
Options Menu  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Installation –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To add users and assign passwords  
Note See Table 7 for a list of password access levels for each menu option available in the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup programs.  
1. Highlight the User ID field and press Ins. A pop-up dialog box displays enabling you to  
enter new user ID information.  
2. Enter a User ID using up to eight characters and press Enter.  
3. Enter the User Name and press Enter.  
4. Enter a Password using up to eight characters and press Enter.  
5. Enter a Password Level and press Enter. The password level defines which Strata DK  
Programs and DKAdmin/DKBackup menu items a user may access (up to 10 levels can be  
created).  
There are currently four (default) levels for DKAdmin:  
2
=
Administrator Level I access. Access to Check System Processor, System/  
Station Administration, ACD Programs (level 2 only) and Port Attributes  
only; no access to password set up, Program Administration, feature  
reference, security maintenance, backup/restore, or view/print/delete data  
functions. Default ID and password is “ADMIN1”.  
5
=
Administrator Level II access. Access to programs with level 5 and below (see  
DKAdmin/DKBackup Security, below, for more information). No access to  
password set up, security maintenance, backup/restore, or view/print/delete  
data functions. Default ID and password is “ADMIN2”.  
8
9
=
Tech Level I access. Access to all programs. No access to password or security  
setup. Default ID and password is “TECH1”.  
=
Master access. Full Access to all functions and screens. Level 9 is typically  
used by managers to assign passwords for Technicians and end users.  
There are currently two (default) levels for DKBackup:  
6
=
Tech Level I access. Access to all programs. No access to password or security  
setup. Default ID and password is “TECH1”.  
9
=
Master access. Full Access to all functions and screens. Level 9 is typically  
used by managers to assign passwords for Technicians and end users.  
6. To add another user ID, press Ins, and repeat Steps 2~5.  
Note Any existing user/password data may be overwritten or deleted.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System Installation  
Table 7  
Password Level Menu Access  
File Menu  
Select Customer  
Maintain Customer  
Dial DK  
Password Access Level  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
6,7,8,9  
Hangup Connection  
Transfer DK Data  
About  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
Password Access Level  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
Exit  
Administration/Backup Menu*  
View Cabinet Diagram  
Check Processor Type*  
System/Station Administration  
Flexible Key Programming Section  
Speed Dial Programming Section  
ACD Administration Section  
Program Administration Section  
Security Maintenance Section  
Directory Number Administration  
DNIS Administration  
9
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
6,7,8,9  
Distributed Hunt Group Administration  
Call Forward Assignments  
E911/CAMA Trunk Programs (R4 Only)  
ISDN Programs (R4 Only)  
Backup/Restore Data*  
View/Print Data*  
6,7,8,9  
Password Access Level  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
9
Options Menu  
System Installation  
Company General Information  
Screen Type/Color Installation  
Printer Type Selection  
System Miscellaneous Variables  
User Password Level Setup  
Options Menu  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Installation –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Table 7  
Password Level Menu Access (continued)  
Communications Setup  
Reindex Files  
6,7,8,9  
0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9  
To change user or password information for an existing user  
1. Access the Password File Maintenance screen (under the User Password Level Set Up  
option).  
2. Highlight the user you wish to change and press Enterto display the user information.  
3. Change the information, as required.  
4. After changing the information, press Enter.  
Note Changes are lost if you press Escbefore pressing Enter. The entry will return to its  
original form.  
To delete a user from the DKAdmin/DKBackup system  
1. Access the Password File Maintenance screen (under the User Password Level Setup  
option).  
2. Highlight the user you want to delete and press Delete.  
3. A confirmation message is displayed. Highlight Yesand press Enter. The user is  
deleted from the system.  
4. Press Escto close the Password File Maintenance screen.  
Communications Setup  
The Communications Setup screen enables you to select the computer serial communications  
port (COM 1 ~ COM 4) which will be connected to the Strata DK (for procedures on  
connecting to the Strata DK, refer to Appendix A). This setup also enables you to select baud  
rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, direct modem initialization and a modem/DIU initialization.  
The communication parameters shown below are the settings that are required to connect to  
the Strata DK and should remain constant.  
Baud Rate = 1200*  
Data Bits = 7  
Parity = Even  
Stop Bits = 1  
*May be up to 9600 if using RSIU.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– System Utilities  
To display the communication settings  
1. Type o. The Option Menu displays.  
2. Type i. The System Installation Submenu displays.  
3. Type o. The Communications Setup  
screen displays (shown right).  
4. To change the Communication port,  
press Enter. A pop-up ports  
window displays.  
5. Highlight the desired port and press  
Enter.  
6. Verify (change if required) that the communication parameters are correct per the first  
paragraph of this section.  
7. Verify (change if required) that the modem and modem/DIU initialization strings are  
correct; these strings are sent to modems when using the DKAdmin/DKBackup Dial DK  
option:  
Direct Modem Initialization: AT; sent to modem connected directly to DKAdmin/  
DKBackup PC COM port or modem installed in DKAdmin/DKBackup PC.  
Note If using a fax/modem, you may have to enter &Q6to the modem initialization string.  
Modem/DIU Initialization: ATS0=1 S2=43 E0 Q0 &C1 &D2 V1 &W0 8Y0; sent to  
modem connected to a PDIU-DS modem pool.  
8. Press Escto close the screen.  
System Utilities  
ReIndex Files  
To reindex files  
1. From the Options Menu, type u. A pop-up box displays.  
2. Press Enterto select ReIndex Files and the files are automatically reindexed.  
3. Press Escto return to the Options Menu.  
Options Menu  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Utilities ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting to Strata DK  
A
This appendix shows how to connect a DKAdmin/DKBackup PC to the Strata DK.  
Hardware Requirements  
The DKAdmin/DKBackup PC is required to edit or change a Strata DK customer database file  
with or without being connected to a Strata DK telephone system. A PC equipped with  
DKAdmin/DKBackup enables you to upload, download, upgrade and/or edit complete Strata  
DK databases.  
Note DKBackup does not provide the edit function.  
The hardware requirements described below are necessary to exchange (send/receive) data  
between the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and a Strata DK telephone system. Exchanging data  
enables the PC to pull customer configuration data from an operating Strata DK and save this  
data, and then send the data to the Strata DK (see Figures 16 to 22 for possible connecting  
configurations).  
The DKAdmin/DKBackup PC must be equipped with an available COM port to enable  
the PC to connect and exchange (send/receive) data with a Strata DK.  
The Strata DK must be equipped with an RSSU, PIOUS, PIOU, or RSIU/RSIS PCB for  
local and/or remote Administration.  
When DKAdmin/DKBackup must interface with a Strata DK remotely (more than 50 feet  
apart):  
The Strata DK PIOU, PIOUS, or RSIU must be equipped with an IMDU or RMDS  
built-in modem; or, the Strata DK RSSU, PIOUS, PIOU, RSIU/RSIS TTY port must  
be connected to an external modem or PDIU-DS data interface unit.  
The DKAdmin/DKBackup PC COM port must be connected to a modem or PDIU-DI  
data interface unit or have a built-in modem.  
System Connection Configurations  
Figures 16 to 22 show possible ways to connect the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC to the Strata  
DK. They provide installation guidelines and instructions for setting up and using the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup built-in auto dialer to call Strata DKs remotely or locally. These figures  
include the following configurations:  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU Setup –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC directly connected to the Strata DK – 50 feet maximum (see  
Figure 16 on Page 130).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC connected to Strata DK via Toshiba Data Interface Units – 1000  
feet maximum (see Figure 17 on Page 131).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC remote modem connected to Strata DK system external  
modem/TTY port (direct modem to modem call)(see Figure 18 on Page 132).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC remote modem connected to Strata DK system built-in IMDU,  
RMDS (or external modem) – voice call first, then modem to modem connection (see  
Figure 19 on Page 133).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC remote modem connected to Strata DK modem pool – then auto  
dial modem pool DIU to Strata DK DIU/TTY port (see Figure 20 on Page 135).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC DIU/DIU modem pool connected to Strata DK system modem  
– voice call first, then modem to modem connection (see Figure 21 on Page 137).  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC DIU/DIU modem pool connected to Strata DK system modem  
– DIU to DIU connection, then modem to modem connection (see Figure 22 on Page 139).  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU/RSIU Setup  
To check the DKAdmin/DKBackup communications setup  
1. From the Options/System Installation/Communication Setup menu, verify that the proper  
COM port is selected and that the communications parameters are set as follows:  
Communications port: COMX (X = 1, 2, 3 or 4)  
Baud rate:  
1200 (If using RSIU TTY port or RMDS,  
the Baud rate can be higher than 1200 bps.)  
Parity:  
Even  
Data bits:  
Stop bits:  
7
1
2. PIOU or PIOUS PCB installed on Strata DK which is connected to DKAdmin/DKBackup  
PC: if using an IMDU, verify that the switch SW2 is set for 1200 bps (LED CD4 off) and  
that SW3 is set to “MODEM.”  
If connecting an external modem, PDIU-DS, or PC COM port directly to the TTY  
modular jack, verify SW2 is set to the “TTY” position.  
3. RSSU does not support the IMDU built-in modem or SMDR, and it has no option  
switches. Its communication parameters (TTY port) are always 1200 bps, even parity, 7  
data bits, 1-stop bit.  
4. Use Program 03 to identify the PCB slot that contains the PCB with the TTY port or  
modem that will be used (Code 41 for PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU or Code 49 for RSIU).  
5. Use Program 76 if RSIU/RSIS/RMDS is used to connect with the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
PC.  
6. Use Program 77-1 (LED 14 and 15) if IMDU or RMDS is used to connect to the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Calling Strata DK Using the Dialer  
Calling Strata DK Using the Dialer  
The DK Dialer is used only to establish a modem-modem or DIU to DIU/modem connection  
between the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC and the DK maintenance modem. The DK Dialer is not  
used when connecting the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC directly to the Strata DK TTY port.  
To call Strata DK using the dialer  
1. From the File Menu, type dto select the Dial DK option and the Customer List screen  
displays.  
2. Highlight the Customer Strata DK you wish to dial.  
Note It is not necessary to use the Select Customer option, when using the Dial DK option.  
3. To set up DIU, modem, or “after connect” dialing strings for the selected customer, press  
Enter. If the dialing strings were set previously, go to next step.  
4. Press F2to connect DIU to DIU (see Figure 17 on Page 131), press F4or F5to connect  
modem to modem (see Figure 18 on Page 132), or Press F4to connect modem to modem  
pool and then dial the PDIU-DS connected to the TTY port (see Figure 20 on Page 135),  
or press F3to connect DIU to modem pool and then dial customer Strata DK (see Figure  
22 on Page 139).  
5. When Function keys F2~ F5are pressed after selecting a customer from the Dial DK  
Option, DKAdmin/DKBackup sends the following with each of the Function Keys. Only  
one Function Key should be used to connect with the DK maintenance modem.  
Pressing F2sends the Communication Setup DIU Initialization String and the  
Customer DIU String.  
Pressing F3sends the Communication Setup DIU Initialization String, the Customer  
DIU String, the Communication Setup Modem Initialization String, the Customer  
Modem String, and, if a connection is established, the After Connect String.  
Pressing F4sends the Communication Setup Modem Initialization String, the  
Customer Modem String, and, if a connection is established, the After Connect String.  
Pressing F5sends the customer Modem String, and, if a connection is established, the  
After Connect String.  
Notes  
The DK security code can be set on the After Connect line in each Customer File setup so  
it will be sent automatically to the Strata DK after connecting the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
PC to the Strata DK remotely via modems. Setting the DK security code in the After  
Connect String is optional.  
In some cases, when connecting to older Release 1 processors or during heavy traffic  
conditions, the After Connect string may be sent and not recognized by the Strata DK. If  
this should occur, do not enter the DK security code in the After Connect string.  
After completing a DKAdmin/DKBackup session via modems or DIUs, always use the  
Hangup Connection option in the File Menu to drop the connection. Once the option is  
activated, DKAdmin/DKBackup sends the modem escape sequence +++and then the  
reset and hangup commands ATZ H, closing the communication link to the DK. Make  
sure the modem escape sequence is set to +++(modem register, S2=43) before using the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC with modems or DIUs.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Direct Connection to Strata DK ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Direct Connection to Strata DK  
PC COM Port  
PPTC-9 (PC 9-pin Adaptor)  
or PPTC-25F  
3-pair Modular Cord  
Customer Strata DK  
RSSU, RSIU,  
(Telephone type, cross-pinned)  
TTY  
TSIU, WSIU  
Port  
(50 Feet Maximum, 24AWG wire)  
or RSIS  
DK Backup/Admin  
Personal Computer  
PIOU, PIOUS  
(SW3 – TTY Position)  
0918  
Program 03 Code 41 for RSSU,  
PIOUS, or PIOU slot.  
Program 03, Code 49 for RSIU  
slot 11.  
Program 76 for RSIU, RSIS, TSIU or  
WSIU TTY port setup  
Figure 16  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC Directly Connected to Strata DK—50 ft. Maximum  
Important! DK Dialer Setup is not required for direct connection. Connection is always  
established; select customer and proceed with Administration or Backup.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Connection to Strata DK Via Toshiba Data Interface Units  
Connection to Strata DK Via Toshiba  
Data Interface Units  
PC COM Port  
Customer Strata DK  
PC to Modem Type  
RSSU, RSIU, TSIU,  
Cable (Dealer Supplied)  
WSIU or RSIS1  
6-pair Modular Cord  
(Telephone type,  
cross-pinned)  
TTY  
Port  
(SW1-4 Off)  
PIOU, PIOUS 1  
(SW3 – TTY Position)  
Digital  
Telephone with  
PDIU-DI  
or RPCI-DI  
(integrated)  
PDIU-DS (YYY)  
***  
DK Backup/Admin  
Personal Computer  
2
PPTC25MDM  
PDKU  
(yellow)  
(SW1-4  
Off)  
DK Prog. 20: LED 01,  
2
04 and 17 ON for PDIU-DS Port  
Station  
DK Prog 20;  
PDKU  
(2-pair - 1000 feet maximum, 24 AWG wire)  
LED 01, 02, and 17  
ON for PDIU-DI  
or RPCI-DI Port  
3093  
Notes  
1. Program 03 Code 41 for RSSU, PIOU, PIOU(S) slot.  
Program 03, Code 49 for RSIU Slot 11.  
Program 76-1, 76-2 for RSIU, RSIS, TSIU, or WSIU TTY Port setup.  
2. Program 03 Code 62 or 64 for PDKU slot.  
3. PDIU-DS Jumper plugs (P1-P9) must be set to the B-C position when  
connected to the TTY port.  
Figure 17  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC Connected to Strata DK Via Toshiba Data Interface Units—1000 ft.  
Maximum  
Customer Dialer Setup  
DIU String: ATS2=43~~~ATDDYYY  
(YYY is the intercom or directory number of the PDIU-DS connected to the TTY port)  
Note ~~~must be entered to send the carriage return signal following ATS2=43.  
Modem String: (nothing)  
After Connect String: (nothing)  
To Make Connection  
1. From File Menu, select Dial DK and press Enter  
2. Highlight the customer form the customer list (scroll with arrow key or type initials)  
3. Press F2to establish the DIU to DIU connection. (The DIU string will be sent from the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup COM port.)  
4. After connection is established, select desired function from the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
Main Menu.  
5. After the DKAdmin/DKBackup session is complete, go to the File Menu and press hto  
hang up the connection.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Modem Connection to External Modem/TTY Port –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Remote Modem Connection to External  
Modem/TTY Port  
Customer Strata DK  
External Modem or  
PC COM Port  
Built-in to PC Modem  
RSSU,RSIU, RSIS,  
TSIU, or WISU  
CO Line  
PPTC25MDM  
(yellow)  
Remote  
Modem  
PIOU, PIOUS  
(SW3 – TTY Position)  
Public  
Telephone  
Network  
TTY  
Port  
External  
Modem  
DK Backup/Admin  
Personal Computer  
0920  
3 Pair Modular Cord  
(Telephone type, cross-pinned)  
Turn off data compression.  
External modem must have the following AT  
commands set:  
(S0=1, B1,E0,L2,M1,Q1,V1,X4,Y0,&C1,&D2,&G0)  
Turn off data compression.  
CO Line or RSTU Port  
(assigned to ring modem)  
Standard PC/  
Modem Cable  
Figure 18  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC Remote Modem Connected to Strata DK External Modem/TTY Port  
(Direct Modem to Modem Call)  
Communication Setup  
(See Communication Setup in Chapter 8 – Options Menu.)  
Use default values for direct modem init. If using a fax/modem, you may have to include  
&Q6or &K0into the modem initialization string to turn off data compression.  
Customer Dialer Setup  
DIU string: (nothing)  
Modem string: ATDTX...X  
(X...X is the telephone number of CO line that rings the external modem).  
After connect string: DK Security Code (optional)  
To Make Connection  
1. From the File Menu select the Dial DK and press Enter.  
2. Highlight customer.  
3. Press F4; DKAdmin/DKBackup causes remote modem to go off-hook and dial the  
external modem. (The Modem Initialization String and the Modem String will be sent  
from the DKAdmin/DKBackup COM port.)  
Note You may press F5in this step to send the customer modem string only and not the  
modem initialization string.  
4. After remote modem and external modem establish communications (handshake),  
DKAdmin/DKBackup will flash back to the DK Dial Option. At this point you may  
proceed with DKAdmin/DKBackup.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Voice Call Transferred to Modem Connection  
5. After the DKAdmin/DKBackup session is complete, go to the File Menu and press hto  
hang up the connection.  
Voice Call Transferred to Modem Connection  
(Strata DK IMDU, RMDS, or External Modem)  
PPTC25MDM  
(yellow)  
Customer Strata DK  
3-Pair Modular  
(Telephone type, cross-pinned)  
DK Backup/Admin  
Personal Computer  
TTY  
PIOU / PIOUS  
IMDU Modem  
SW3, or RSIU  
/RMDS modem2  
PC to Modem Type  
Cable (Dealer Supplied)  
RS-232  
Line  
RSTU  
External Modem2  
CO Line  
Public  
Telephone  
Network  
RCOU  
Remote  
Modem1  
CO Line  
PDKU  
Port  
External modem must have the following AT  
commands set:  
0921  
Standard  
Telephone  
(S0=1, B1,E0,L2,M1,Q1,V1,X4,Y0,&C1,&D2, &G0)  
Turn off data compression.  
Digital  
Telephone  
Voice Path  
Data Path  
Notes 1. External or Built-in to PC. Turn off data compression.  
2. Either IMDU, RMDS, or External modem can be used to connect remotely. If IMDU  
is used, put SW3 in the Modem position; if an External modem is used, put SW3 in  
the TTY position. Refer to Progams 76 and 77-1 to setup RMDS modem.  
Figure 19  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC Modem Connected to Strata DK System Built-in IMDU, RMDS (or  
External Modem) Voice Call First, then Modem to Modem Connection  
Communication Setup  
(See Communication Setup in Chapter 8 – Options Menu.)  
Use default values for direct modem init. If using a fax/modem, you may have to include  
&Q6or &K0into the modem initialization string to turn off data compression.  
Direct modem initialization should be: Default.  
Customer Dialer Setup  
DIU string: (nothing)  
Modem string: ATX3 D  
Note For some 14.4 or 28.8 fax modems, you may have to enter AT&Q6X3 D.  
After connect string: DK Security Code (optional)  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Voice Call Transferred to Modem Connection –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To Make Connection  
1. From File Menu, type d.  
2. Highlight the customer from the customer list.  
3. At the remote site, use the standard telephone (connected to the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
remote modem) to call a telephone (or attendant console) at the customer site.  
4. When the call is answered, request that the call be transferred to the IMDU or RMDS by  
dialing Cnf/Trn + # 1 9; or, if using an external modem connected to the TTY port, by  
dialing Cnf/Trn + the external modem (RSTU) station number.  
Important! The transferring party must hang up after transferring to the modem.  
5. After the call is transferred and you hear modem tone from the IMDU, RMDS, or external  
modem, press F5, hang up the standard telephone when the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC  
modem goes off-hook. (The Modem String will be sent from the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
COM port.) The modems will handshake and connect, the After Connect String is sent to  
the Strata DK (if programmed).  
Note If you press F4in this step, DKAdmin/DKBackup will send the Modem Initialization  
String (from the Communications Setup Option) and then the Modem String (from the  
Customer File). If using a 28.8 fax/modem with you DKAdmin/DKBackup PC, it may  
be necessary to include &Q6or &K0in the Modem Initialization String to turn off data  
compression.  
6. After the connection is established, select the desired function from the Administration  
Menu/Backup Menu and proceed.  
7. After the DKAdmin/DKBackup session is completed, go to the File Menu and press hto  
hang up the connection. The DKAdmin/DKBackup PC sends +++ ATZ Hto the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC modem, closing the communication link to the DK.  
Important!  
When connected to an IMDU or RMDS modem, the Strata DK will drop the connection if  
an incorrect DK maintenance security code is entered during a DKAdmin/DKBackup  
backup session.  
You may put the DK maintenance security code on the After Connect line in the Customer  
File setup. DKAdmin/DKBackup sends the DK security code automatically after the  
modem in the Strata DK and the DKAdmin/DKBackup modem establish connection. The  
data set in After Connect is sent after modem connection is established whenever F3, F4,  
or F5 is used.  
If the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC/modem connects to the Strata DK modem but then  
DKAdmin/DKBackup closes the COM port immediately, perform the following steps and  
try again:  
Make sure DKAdmin/DKBackup modem baud rate is the same as the Strata DK  
modem baud rate.  
Run the ReIndex Files option from the DKAdmin/DKBackup Options/System Utilities  
Submenu.  
Remove the DK security code from the After Connect String.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Remote Modem Connection to Modem Pool  
Remote Modem Connection to Modem Pool  
Customer Strata DK  
RSSU, RSIU,TSIU,  
WSIU or RSIS2  
3-pair Modular Cord  
(Telephone type, cross-pinned)  
TTY  
PIOU, PIOUS2  
Port  
Standard PC / Modem  
Cable  
(SW3 – TTY Position)  
PDIU-DS (YYY)  
PDIU-DS (XXX)  
CO LINE  
3
PPTC25MDM  
CO Line  
PDKU  
Remote  
Modem1  
(yellow)  
Public  
Telephone  
Network  
4
PDKU  
0922  
DK Backup/Admin  
Personal Computer  
External  
Modem Pool  
See Figure A-7 for PDIU-DS  
modem pool configuration  
Turn off data compression.  
External modem must have the following AT  
commands set:  
(ATS0 = 1, ATB1_E0_L2_M1_Q1_V1_X4_Y0_&C1_&D2_&G0)  
Turn off data compression.  
Notes 1. External or Built-in to PC.  
2. Program 03 Code 41 for RSSU, PIOU, PIOU(S) slot.  
Program 03, Code 49 for RSIU Slot 11.  
Program 76-1, 76-2 for RSIU, RSIS, TSIU, or WISU TTY Port setup.  
3. Program 03 Code 62 or 64 for PDKU slot.  
4. PDIU-DS Jumper plugs (P1-P9) must be set to the B-C position when connected to the TTY port.  
Figure 20  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC Remote Modem Connected to Strata DK Modem Pool – Then Auto  
Dial Modem Pool DIU to Strata DK DIU/TTY Port.  
Communication Setup  
DIU initialization string: use default values. Use default values for direct modem init. If  
using a fax/modem, you may have to include &Q6or &K0into the modem initialization  
string to turn off data compression.  
Direct modem init should be: default  
Customer Dialer Setup  
DIU string: (nothing)  
Modem string: ATDTXXXXXX.  
(XXXXXX is the external modem CO line number)  
After connect string: AT~~~ATDDYYY~~~  
(YYY is the intercom number of the PDIU-DS connected to the TTY Port. (~~~ must be  
used to send carriage return signals.) The DKAdmin/DKBackup dialer sends this string to  
connect the PDIU-DS (XXX) to PDIU-D (YYY) when it detects (connect 1200) that the  
remote modem has connected to the external modem.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Modem Connection to Modem Pool ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To Make Connection  
1. From the File Menu select Dial DK and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the customer form the customer list.  
3. Press F4to establish remote modem to external modem connection; the Modem  
Initialization String, the Modem String, and the After Connect String will be sent from the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC COM port.  
(After the modems connect, the “After connect” string will be sent out to cause PDIU-DS  
(XXX) to connect to PDIU-DS (YYY). DKAdmin/DKBackup goes back to the File  
Menu.)  
4. Complete the DKAdmin/DKBackup administration functions.  
5. After the DKAdmin/DKBackup session is completed, go to the File Menu and press hto  
hang up the connection.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK Modem  
PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK  
Modem  
Voice Call First, then Modem to Modem Connection  
DK Backup/Admin  
Personal Computer  
Remote Digital  
Telephone with PDIU-  
D2 or RPCI-DI  
Remote Strata DK  
Customer Strata DK  
Voice Path  
Data Path  
PIOU or  
PIOUS with  
IMDU Modem  
SW3 Modem  
Position or  
RSIU with  
RMDS  
COM  
Port  
2
Public  
Telephone  
Network  
RCOU  
RCOU  
1
PDKU  
RSTU  
RSTU  
RS-232  
Cable  
0923  
CO Lines  
Attendant  
Digital  
Telephone  
• SW1-4 Off  
• Prog 20: LED 01,  
02 and 17 ON for  
PDIU-DI Port  
PDIU-DS  
Remote  
Modem Pool  
RS232  
Notes  
1. Program 03 Code 62 or 64 for PDKU slot.  
2. Program 39 The remote digital telephone must be equipped with  
the Data, Data Release, and Modem buttons.  
See Figure A-8 for PDIU-DS/  
Modem Pool Configuration  
Program 21 Assignment  
Figure 21  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connected to Strata DK Modem – Voice Call  
First, Then Modem to Modem Connection.  
Communication Setup  
Use default values.  
Customer Dialer Setup  
DIU string: (nothing)  
Modem string: ATD#42  
After connect string: (nothing)  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK Modem ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To Make Connection  
1. Select Customer from the Dial DK Option.  
2. Call attendant at customer Strata DK from remote digital telephone (voice call using  
telephone handset).  
3. From the remote digital telephone, press the Modem button to reserve the remote modem.  
The Modem button LED flashes.  
4. When attendant answers, request to be transferred to the IMDU or RMDS (attendant must  
press Conf + # 1 9) and ask attendant to hang up.  
5. When you hear IMDU or RMDS modem tone, press the Data button on the remote digital  
telephone and then press F5(voice/modem) on the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC keyboard.  
The call is picked up by to the RSTU remote modem, disconnecting the voice path, and  
establishing the data path between the Strata DK modem, the PDIU-DS modem and the  
remote digital telephone PDIU/RPCI. The Data and Modem button LEDs are red steady.  
6. After the IMDU or RMDS and remote modem communicate (handshake), proceed with  
DKAdmin/DKBackup.  
7. After the DKAdmin/DKBackup session is complete, go to the File Menu and press hto  
hang up the connection.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK Modem  
PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK  
Modem  
DIU to DIU Connection, then Modem to Modem Connection  
DK Backup/Admin  
Personal Computer  
Digital  
Remote Strata DK  
Customer Strata DK  
Telephone  
with PDIU-D2  
or RPCI-DI  
COM  
Port  
PIOU or  
PIOUS with  
IMDU Modem  
Public  
Telephone  
Network  
SW3 Modem  
Position or  
RCOU  
RSTU  
RCOU  
RSIU with  
RMDS  
*
PDKU  
RS-232  
Cable  
Directory  
CO Lines  
0924  
2-pair  
(1000 ft  
maximum)  
Number XXX  
or Intercom  
Number XXX  
Program 03 Code 41  
for PIOU or PIOUS.  
• SW1-4 Off  
Program 03 Code 49  
for RSIU with RMDS  
Remote  
Modem  
• Prog 20: LED 01,  
02 and 17 ON for  
PDIU-DI, RPCI-DI  
Port  
PDIU-DS  
Program 76 with 77-1  
for RSIU with RMDS  
setup  
RS232  
See Figure A-8 for  
PDIU-DS / Modem  
Pool Configuration  
*
Program code 62 or 64 in  
Program 03 for PDKU PCBs  
that support PDIUS.  
Figure 22  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connected to Strata DK Modem – DIU to  
DIU Connection, then Modem to Modem Connection.  
Communication Setup  
Use default values.  
Customer Dialer Setup  
DIU string: ATS2=43~~~ATDDXXX  
(where XXX is the intercom or directory number of the PDIU-DS modem pool)  
Modem string: ATDTY...Y  
(where Y...Y is the CO line access code plus the telephone number of the CO line that will  
ring the IMDU or RMDS modem)  
After connect string: DK security code (optional)  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PC DIU/DIU Modem Pool Connection to Strata DK Modem ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
To Make Connection  
1. Highlight Customer from the Dial DK Option and press Enter.  
2. Highlight the appropriate customer, then press F3; the digital telephone DIU will connect  
to the remote modem PDIU-DS and then the remote modem will go off hook and seize a  
CO line and dial the CO line which rings the IMDU (normal ringing assignments in Strata  
DK Programs 81~89).  
Pressing F3causes the DIU Initialization String, the DIU String, the Modem Initialization  
String, and the Modem String to be sent from the DKAdmin/DKBackup PC COM port in  
the order described here.  
3. After the IMDU or RMDS and remote modem communicate (handshake), proceed with  
DKAdmin/DKBackup.  
4. After the DKAdmin/DKBackup session is completed, go to the File Menu and press hto  
hang up the connection.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PDIU-DS Modem Pool Installation  
PDIU-DS Modem Pool Installation  
A B C  
P5  
P1  
P2  
SIDE GROOVES  
EX.  
P7  
P4  
P3  
P6  
P8  
P9  
POWER  
W3  
PERCEPTION  
W1  
W6  
W8  
W2  
SW1  
DTE/MODEM  
JUMPER PLUGS  
P1~P9  
BOTTOM  
PANEL  
PDIU-DS  
PCB  
0925DK  
Figure 23  
External Modem to Strata DK TTY Port Connection  
To Make Connection  
When connecting a PDIU-DS to a modem for modem pool operation (see Figures 20 to 22),  
set up the PDIU-DS and modem per Steps 1 ~ 7 below.  
1. PDIU-DS P1 through P9 jumper connections/option switch settings:  
a. Remove PDIU-DS cover.  
b. Install all PDIU-DS jumper-plugs except P3 and P4 across B-C.  
c. Remove jumper plugs from P3 and P4.  
d. Solder on or wire wrap W6 and W8 jumper wires as shown (W6 and W8 are dealer-  
supplied)  
e. PDIU-DS SW1 option switch settings:  
SW1-2 and SW1-4 should be on (down).  
W1-1 and SW1-3 should be off (up).  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PDIU-DS Modem Pool Installation ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
2. PDIU-DS port Program 20 options:  
LED 01, 02, 04, and 17 on; all other LEDs off for PDIU-DS port if connecting the modem  
to a CO line; if connecting the modem to an RSTU port, turn on LED 01, 02, 03, 04, and  
17 for the PDIU-DS port.  
Notes  
LED 02 must be turned off until the AT commands shown in 3 below have been set on the  
modem connected to the PDIU-DS. After the listed AT commands are sent to the modem,  
LED 02 in program should be turned on for the PDIU-DS port.  
Only turn LED 03 on if the telephone/PDIU-DI modem pool key (Program 39-code 455)  
is required. Otherwise turn LED 03 off. If LED 03 is OFF, the PDIU-DS READY LED  
will indicate the modem carrier detect status; and, the PDIU-DS will beep when a PDIU-  
DI connects to it. If LED 03 is ON, the telephone modem key will indicate modem pool  
status but the PDIU-DS READY LED will always be off and the PDIU-DS will not beep  
when a PDIU-DS connects to it.  
3. The following AT command line must be sent to the modem (sent via DK Dialer Modem/  
DIU initialization string):  
ATS0=1 S2=43 E0 Q0 &C1 &D2 V1 &W0 &Y0 <CR>(See Note 1 above.)  
4. If connecting the modem to an RSTU port, use Program 21 to assign the PDIU-DS port to  
the RSTU port. Use Program 39 to assign DATA, DATA RELEASE, and MODEM keys to  
digital telephones that use the modem pool.  
5. Connect the modem “line” to a CO line or RSTU port.  
6. Connect the PDIU-DS modular jack to the PDKU port assigned in Program 20.  
7. Connect the modem RS-232 connector to the PDIU-DS RS-232 connector with a straight  
DB-25 to DB-25 (male to male) cable.  
Important! Make sure all PDKU PCBs slots that support PDIU-DS or PDIU-DI are  
programmed with Code 62 or 64 in Program 03.  
External Maintenance Modem Installation  
See Figures 18 and 19, as applicable, and install the external modem in accordance with the  
following steps:  
Note The Toshiba PPTC RS-232 modular-to-DB25 adapter is factory configured for ASCII  
terminal connection. Pins 2 and 3, and Pins 8 and 20 of the adapter must be reversed  
on the DB25 end for external modem connection (see wiring diagram below).  
1. Connect the modular cord from the RSSU, PIOU or PIOUS TTY port to the PPTC adapter  
and then to the external maintenance modem RS-232 25-pin connector.  
2. Connect the external maintenance modem line-side to a dedicated CO line, tip and ring  
(see Figure 18 on Page 132) or to a dedicated standard telephone port, tip and ring (see  
Figure 19 on Page 133). Refer to Chapter 8 – DK16e/DK424 Universal Slot PCB Wiring  
in the Strata DK Installation and Maintenance Manual for wiring/interconnecting details.  
3. Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW2 switch to match the modem or terminal baud rate:  
Push in for 300 bps (baud rate indicator CD4 is lit); let out (by pushing again) for 1200  
bps (CD4 is not lit), RSSU is always 1200 bps. Use 1200 bps with DKAdmin/  
DKBackup.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– PDIU-DS Modem Pool Installation  
4. Set the PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch to the TTY position (RSSU is always TTY, SW3 is  
not required).  
Note The PIOU or PIOUS SW3 switch is set to the MODEM position for IMDU operation  
only.  
5. Set the P13 jumper plug on the PIOU to the BELL configuration, or cut the W4 jumper on  
the PIOUS (also for BELL configuration).  
Note The P13 (PIOU) and W4 (PIOUS) CCITT configurations are not normally used in the  
USA.  
6. Use Program 03, Code 41 for PIOU, PIOUS, or RSSU TTY port; or, Code 49 for RSIU/  
RSIS, Slot 11. If using RISU or RSIS, set the appropriate TTY port and TTY port baud  
rate using Program 76.  
7. Set the communication parameters of DKAdmin/DKBackup to: 1200, 2400, or 9600 BPS,  
7 data bit, even parity, and one stop-bit. This is done from the DKAdmin/DKBackup  
Options/System Installation/Communication Setup Option.  
8. Use the DKAdmin/DKBackup “Dial DK” function to call the External modem from the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup PC as follows:  
If the External modem is connected to a dedicated CO line, call the CO line number to  
establish modem communication (see Figure 18 on Page 132).  
If the External modem is connected to a standard telephone port, call a Strata DK CO  
line that can be transferred to (or programmed to ring) the standard telephone modem  
port to establish modem communication. It is also possible to establish  
communications by calling in on a Strata DK DISA DID, or Auto Attendant, CO line  
and dialing the intercom number of the modem connected to the standard telephone  
port (see Figure 19 on Page 133).  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PDIU-DS Modem Pool Installation ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
PPCT (Modular to DB25) Adaptor, Modified Wiring for Connecting TTY Jack to  
an External Modem (only if null-modem adaptor is not used with PPTC):  
Modem  
RS-232  
PPTC1A-5M Adaptor  
PIOU/PIOUS, TTY Jack  
Modular Pin Number  
Modular Pin No.  
DB25 Pin No.  
Lead Name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
to  
RD  
RD,  
6 to  
5 to  
4 to  
3 to  
2 to  
1 to  
2*  
TD  
TD  
TD,  
3*  
RD  
DSR  
DTR  
DCD  
SG  
DSR,  
DTR,  
DCD,  
SG,  
6
DSR  
DCD  
DTR  
8*  
20*  
7
SG  
0926  
4 Jumper to 5  
RTS to CTS  
Important! PPTC1A-5M, pins 2 & 3 and pins 8 & 20 must be reversed in the field, as  
*
shown, for modem connection. Set Hayes modem to track status of carrier  
detect signal (AT and C1) and to answer (ATS0 = 1).  
Figure 24  
External Modem to Strata DK TTY Port Connection  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DK424 RCTUE/F  
Upgrade Using DKAdmin  
B
This appendix discusses considerations and steps for upgrading the Strata DK424 digital  
business telephone system to an RCTUE/F processor.  
DKAdmin software is required to upgrade a DK14, DK16e, DK40 or any DK280/DK424  
RCTUA, RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB, or RCTUC/D database to an RCTUE/F processor.  
DKAdmin requires the red 280Admin software protection key installed on the PC LPT1  
printer port. This is the same red key used for running 280Admin.  
For best results DKAdmin must be installed on a PC with a Pentium processor with 16MB of  
RAM.  
To install DKAdmin  
See Chapter 2 – Installing DKAdmin for step-by-step instructions.  
To run DKAdmin  
At the DOS prompt or Windows Run command screen, change to the 280Admin path and  
type: dkadminand press Enterto run the program.  
Upgrading to RCTUE/F  
The upgrade can be completed on- or off-site. Before upgrading, use DKAdmin to create a  
new customer file and download the existing RCTU database. This customer file can be used  
as a back-up for your existing RCTU processor and should not be used in the upgrade process.  
Off-site Upgrade  
If you have a Strata DK280 or DK424 at your dealer office, you can save time and travel, by  
downloading an existing database from the customer to your site via modem. Once initialized  
and upgraded you can then deliver and install the upgraded PCB at the customer site.  
To do an off-site upgrade  
1. From the File Menu, type mto select the Maintain Customer File function.  
2. Create a new customer database by selecting the existing DK16e or RCTU (A, B, BA/BB,  
or C/D) and Release (Release 1/Release 2 or Release 3 version).  
3. From the File Menu, type sto select the Select Customer function.  
4. Highlight the new customer and press Enter.  
DK424 RCTUE/F Upgrade Using DKAdmin  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
145  
Upgrading to RCTUE/F ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
5. Using the Backup/Restore Data function on the Administration Menu, download the  
complete customer database via modem or disk by pressing F2then F3.  
After the customer database is downloaded and built, it can be upgraded to the RCTUE/F  
processor.  
6. Install the RCTUE/F processor into the DK280 or DK424 base cabinet (see the Strata  
I&M Manual for more details). Remove the MBJU (DK424 Base only).  
7. From the programming telephone, run Program 91-9 twice to initialize the RCTUE/F  
processor.  
8. From the programming telephone run Programs 03, 76, and 77-1 to set up the TTY  
interface port.  
9. Turn the system power off for five seconds then turn the power back on.  
10. Connect the DKAdmin PC to the system TTY interface port; check communication  
between the DKAdmin program and RCTUE/F processor is operating properly.  
11. Using DKAdmin, select the customer database created in Step 2.  
12. Check the PCB code for the TTY PCB (PIOU, RSIU, etc.) is set properly in Program 03.  
13. From the Administration Menu, select the Back/Restore Data function and press Enter.  
Press F5to select Upgrade.  
14. Follow the upgrade steps in DKAdmin; select the RCTUE/F processor. Answer Noto  
“Backup From DK First?” and Noto “Pull Program 03?”.  
15. After DKAdmin upgrades and uploads the customer database, it prompts you to “Perform  
Automatic Power OFF/ON”; answer Yes. DKAdmin runs Program 91-2, then prompts  
you to receive data to complete the upgrade process; answer Yes. DKAdmin downloads  
the upgraded RCTUE/F database and builds the customer file.  
16. The upgrade is now complete. Install the upgraded RCTUE/F at your customer site.  
On-Site Upgrade  
If upgrading on-site, the DKAdmin upgrade process pulls the current existing customer  
database.  
To do an on-site upgrade  
1. Connect the DKAdmin PC to the system TTY interface port; check that DKAdmin is  
communicating with the existing RCTU processor.  
2. From the File Menu, type mto select the Maintain Customer File function.  
3. Create a new customer database by selecting the existing DK16e or RCTU (A, B, BA/BB,  
or C/D) and Release (Release 1/Release 2 or Release 3 version).  
4. Select the new customer created in Step 3  
5. From the Administration Menu, select the Back/Restore Data function and press Enter.  
Press F5to select Upgrade.  
6. Follow the upgrade steps in DKAdmin; select the RCTUE/F processor. Answer Yesto  
“Backup From DK First?” and Yesto “Pull Program 03?”. DKAdmin downloads the  
database from the existing RCTU processor.  
7. After DKAdmin downloads the database from the existing RCTU processor, DKAdmin  
prompts you to change the processors etc. (i.e., turn power off, remove the existing  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Important Things to Do After Upgrading to an RCTUE/F Processor  
processor, remove the MBJU from DK424 Base Cabinet per Chapter 5 – DK424  
Installation in the Strata I/M Manual, and install the RCTUE/F processor).  
8. From the programming telephone run Program 91-9 (twice) to initialize the RCTU E/F  
processor.  
9. From the programming telephone run Programs 03, 76, and 77-1 to set up the TTY  
interface port.  
10. Turn system power off for five seconds then turn power back on.  
11. Continue the upgrade by following the DKAdmin prompts.  
12. After DKAdmin upgrades and uploads the customer database, it prompts you to “Perform  
Automatic Power OFF/ON”; answer Yes. DKAdmin runs Program 91-2, then prompts  
you to receive data to complete the upgrade process; answer Yes. DKAdmin downloads  
the upgraded RCTUE/F database and builds the customer file.  
The upgrade is now complete.  
Important Things to Do After Upgrading to an RCTUE/F  
Processor  
Using DKAdmin, run Program 03 to identify DK424 cabinets.  
*
If installing line and/or station PCBs in slots 07 and 08 of a DK424 expansion cabinet,  
circuit line and port numbers in slots that follow will shift. It is recommended you move  
the appropriate station and line cables back to the new installed PCBs. This insures that  
telephone and line programs match the physical ports and lines.  
Do not try to swap or relocate ports in Program 01 or 02 to match port programming to  
physical connections.  
When using an RCTUE/F processor in a DK424 Base Cabinet, you must remove the  
MBJU from between the R11 and RCTU slot of the DK424 Base Cabinet.  
In the above configuration, only DK424 Expansion Cabinets provide eight universal PCB  
slots (S_1 to S_8). DK280 Expansion Cabinets only provide six universal slots (S_1 to  
S_6) in this or any other configuration of RCTU processor and Base Cabinet (see the  
Strata I&M Manual for more configuration details).  
ACD overflow assignment codes in Programs 14-4, 14-5, and 14-6 have been upgraded to  
the new codes in the RCTUE/F.  
Station speed dial codes *10-*49 have been upgraded to the new RCTUE/F codes *100-  
*139, respectively, in REPALL and Programs 29, 29, 39, and 59.  
*
ACD and IMDU/RMDS port numbers have been upgraded to the new RCTUE/F codes in  
Programs 09 and 71.  
*
DK424 RCTUE/F Upgrade Using DKAdmin  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
147  
Important Things to Do After Upgrading to an RCTUE/F Processor ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to  
DK424 Release 4.0  
C
The following important items must be considered when upgrading the DK14, DK16e, DK40,  
DK280, and DK424 Release 1~3 systems to a DK424 Release 4.0.  
A new feature in DK424 Release 4.0 is increased station capacity in systems containing Tie  
and Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lines. In Release 4.0, the station capacity of systems that  
contain Tie/DID lines increases due to Release 4.0 eliminating automatic assignment of station  
ports to DID and Tie lines. Tie and DID lines provided by RDDU, RDTU, RPTU, REMU, and  
PEMU circuit cards do not use station ports.  
This appendix provides instructions and examples of how DKAdmin/DK Backup, Release 4.0  
adjusts for station port shifting caused by Tie and/or DID lines when upgrading to DK424,  
Release 4.0 software and above. This phenomenon occurs only when upgrading to DK424  
Release 4.0 processors in systems that have station PCBs installed in higher numbered slots  
than Tie/DID line PCBs.  
Table 8 shows the different DK upgrade possibilities using the Release 4.0 version of  
DKAdmin/DKBackup. For example, you can upgrade from an RCTUA, R3 to an RCTUBB,  
R4; however, you cannot upgrade an RCTUA, R3 to an RCTUD, R1/R2.  
Table 8  
DKAdmin or DKBackup, Release 4.0, Upgrade Configurations  
Upgrade To ⁄  
DK14  
R1  
DK16e  
R1  
DK40  
R1  
RCTUA  
RCTUB  
R1/R2  
RCTUBB  
RCTUD  
RCTUF  
R3 R4  
Upgrade From‹  
R1  
R3  
X
R4  
X
R3  
X
R4  
X
R1/R2  
R3  
X
R4  
X
DK16e  
DK40  
R1  
R1  
R1  
R3  
R4  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RCTUA  
X
X
R1/  
R2  
RCTUB  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R3  
R4  
X
X
X
X
RCTUBB  
R1/  
R2  
X
X
X
X
X
X
RCTUD  
RCTUF  
R3  
R4  
R3  
X
X
X
X = an upgrade is available.  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
149  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Procedure –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Procedure  
1. Using DKAdmin or DKBackup Release 4.0, download the customer data from the  
currently installed processor. Save this “Customer” data as a backup in case you must re-  
install the current processor and/or processor ROM/Flash memory release level.  
Note You must use DKAdmin or DKBackup Release 4.0 for this procedure. Prior releases  
of these programs do not provide DK Release 4.0 Upload/Download/Upgrade  
capabilities.  
2. Using DKAdmin or DKBackup, create a new customer for the upgrade.  
Important! When creating the new customer, select the currently installed processor type and  
release level—not the R4.0 Release level.  
3. Using DKAdmin or DKBackup, select the customer created in Step 2 (not Step 1).  
4. Start the upgrade procedure, using the Upgrade (F5) function from the “Backup/Restore  
Data” menu.  
5. Choose Yeswhen prompted to Backup From DK First.  
6. After the current data is downloaded, follow the DKAdmin/DKBackup screen instructions  
to change the processor and/or ROMs/flash memory and reinitialize. The procedure for  
changing ROMs and flash memory is provided in figures on the following pages of this  
appendix.  
Important! When changing the processor and ROM/flash memory for the “Upgrade to”  
processsor, you can add one RSIU to complete the upgrade at 9600 bps.  
However:  
Do not add a new station or Tie/DID line PCBs.  
Do not change the order in which the PCBs are installed in the slots.  
Be sure to reinitialize the “Upgrade to” processor twice and set the DK TTY  
port with Programs 76 and 03.  
7. Continue with the upgrade procedure as prompted by the DKAdmin or DKBackup screens  
until the process is complete.  
Note An upgrade example, “DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example”  
on Page 154, describes what changes take place in the customer data during the  
DKAdmin/DKBackup upgrade procedure to make the upgrade transparent to the end  
user.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
1. Power down the system before removing and installing the processor card(s). Figure 25  
shows the slot placement of the processor cards.  
2. Remove only the RCTUA, RCTUBB, RCTUD, or RCTUF.  
3. Remove the MOH connection, if required.  
Heartbeat LED  
Heartbeat LED  
P2  
P2  
P3  
P2  
P2  
P3  
P11  
P11  
To RSIU if installed  
To RSIU if installed  
RCTUD only  
RCTUBA  
or  
RCTUBB,  
RCTUA,  
RCTUE  
RCTUF  
RCTUC  
or RCTUD  
Slot R11  
Slot RCTU (Base Cabinet)  
Slot R11 Slot RCTU (Base Cabinet)  
1394  
1924  
Figure 25  
RRCU Removal and Component Placement  
4. Remove the RRCS DTMF PCB on the RCTU card, if equipped (see Figures 26~29).  
Backplane Connector  
P5  
P4  
RRCS  
P1  
Connectors  
Install in “RCTU” Slot  
Tone  
ROM  
Software  
Version  
R4 =  
IC12  
CBRUK  
Program  
ROMs  
IC15, 16, 17,  
and 18  
RKYS  
Key Socket  
Heartbeat LED  
IC17  
IC15 IC16  
P11  
IC18  
RRCS  
Connectors  
P3 P2  
P12  
BGM and MOH  
Interface  
RCTUA4  
Upgrade Label  
(RCA Jack)  
Feature Upgrade  
Connectors  
BGM/MOH Volume Control  
1366  
(not used)  
To RSIU  
Figure 26  
RCTUA Printer Circuit  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0 –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Backplane Connector  
Software  
P1  
Version  
Install in  
R4 =  
“RCTU” Slot  
CBRUK  
Program  
IC10  
ROMS  
IC9, 10, 11, and 12  
U3  
To RCTUBA/RSIU  
Connectors  
IC9  
CD5  
Heartbeat LED  
Upgrade Label  
RKYS  
Key Socket  
P2  
P3  
RCTUBB4  
3195  
Ribbon Cable to RCTUBA  
Ribbon Cable to RCTUBA  
(and RSIU if installed)  
Figure 27  
RCTUBB4 Printed Circuit Board  
P8  
P7  
P1  
Software  
Version R4 =  
P9  
ON  
OFF  
BATT  
Program  
ROMS  
IC10  
IC9, 10, 11, and 12  
U3 U4  
IC9  
P2  
P3  
Upgrade  
Label  
RCTUD4.X  
P6  
P5  
To RCTUC (and RSIU, if installed)  
To RCTUC  
3183  
Figure 28  
RCTUD4 Printed Circuit Board  
Backplane Connector  
P9  
P10  
RRCS  
Connectors  
RMMS  
CAUTION!  
CBRUK  
When removing the RMMS  
from RCTUF, take off the  
RMMS slowly, rocking back  
and forth in the direction of  
the arrows in the diagram.  
Software  
Version R4 = X 2  
REA4X  
H
RCTUE/RSIU  
Connectors  
P2  
P3  
Heartbeat LED  
P5  
ON BATT OFF  
RCTUF4  
P8  
Upgrade Label  
To RCTUE  
To RCTUE (and RSIU, if Installed)  
3182  
RRCS Connectors  
Figure 29  
RCTUF4 Printed Circuit Board with RMMS  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
5. Using a small screwdriver, carefully remove the four ROMs or flash memory (see Figure  
30).  
6. Replace with the equivalent ROMs or flash memory in the upgrade kit. Peel the labels  
(two locations) off the card.  
(back)  
Designates Front of Chip  
Turn Very Gently  
(front)  
IC Socket Mounted on  
Processor's PCB  
Front Direction Marker  
Silk-screened on PCB  
CAUTION! Be careful not to break the IC socket  
or scratch the PCB trace.  
Do Not Break  
IC Socket  
Do Not Scratch PCB  
2514  
Figure 30  
ROM Removal  
7. Re-install the RRCS DTMF PCB, if required.  
Note If there are battery straps on the PCB, make sure that they are placed in the “on”  
position for the processor card(s) to avoid losing your data.  
8. Re-insert the processor card(s), reconnect the ribbon cables and MOH connection, if  
necessary. If an RSIU card is being added, shift the card positions accordingly, add the  
RSIU PCB in slot 11 and change the ribbon cable to connect the RCTU PCB(s) to the  
RSIU.  
Note any changes needed to accommodate the displaced card, if necessary. If this creates  
extensive changes, it may be better to upgrade without adding the RSIU, get the system  
working, and then adjust the card positions to add the RSIU card.  
9. Turn the Strata DK system back on and follow the DKAdmin/DKBackup instruction  
screens for completing the upgrade.  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
153  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example  
Important! When upgrading to DK424 Release 4.0 from a lower release, it is highly  
recommended to use the DKAdmin or DKBackup Release 4.0 PC software  
program. Trying to upgrade to Release 4.0 manually from the programming  
telephone could take many hours.  
The following Release 3.0 to Release 4.0 upgrade example demonstrates some basic  
programming changes automatically performed by DKAdmin due to station port shifting.  
Station port shifting only occurs when station PCBs are in higher numbered slots than Tie and/  
or DID lines.  
This example does not give you every program change required, nor does it attempt to instruct  
you on how to re-program a system upgraded to Release 4.0, using the programming  
telephone. This is a simple system upgrade; an actual installed systems can be much more  
complex to upgrade.  
Cabinet Station Port Counting Before/After Release 4.0 Upgrade  
Figures 31 shows the DKAdmin cabinet drawing of a DK424 system with an:  
RCTUE3/F3 processor  
RSIU interface  
16 Digital telephones  
4 analog DID lines  
Notice that the RDDU PCB increments the station ports by four ports.  
PCB Placement per Program 03  
Cabinet 1  
PCB Type  
R11  
RCTU  
S11  
S12  
PDKU2  
S13  
S14  
PDKU2  
S15  
S16  
RCTUE3  
RCTUF3  
RSIU  
RDDU  
000~007  
008~011  
001~004  
012~019  
Port Nos.  
Line Nos.  
Option/Note  
Figure 31  
Cabinet Drawing for RCTUE3/F3 Before Release 4 Upgrade  
Figure 32 shows the same DKAdmin cabinet drawing after upgrading to an RCTUE3/F4 with  
DKAdmin.  
Notice that the telephones connected to the PDKU2 in slot 14 were on ports 012~019 but are  
now on ports 008~015, respectively. This phenomenon requires many programming changes  
to enable the DK system to operate the same as it did prior to the upgrade. DKAdmin/  
DK Backup Release 4.0 is designed to make all programming changes automatically to enable  
the upgrade to be transparent to the system operation.  
PCB Placement per Program 03  
Cabinet 1  
R11  
RCTU  
S11  
S12  
PDKU2  
S13  
S14  
PDKU2  
S15  
S16  
RCTUE3  
RCTUF4  
RSIU  
RDDU  
PCB Type  
000~007  
008~015  
Port Nos.  
Line Nos.  
Option/Note  
001~004  
Figure 32  
Cabinet Drawing for RCTUE3/F4 After Release 4 Upgrade  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example  
System/Station Administration Screen Before/After Release 4.0 Upgrade  
Figure 33 shows the DKAdmin System/Station Administration Screen of the same DK424  
Release 3 system shown in Figure 31. Figure 34 shows the same after upgrading to RCTUE3/  
F4 with DKAdmin.  
The following table summarizes the changes in Figure 34 after the upgrade:  
Before the Upgrade  
After the Upgrade  
Deleted  
Ports 008~011  
as DL (or DID) ports  
RDDU in Slot 13  
Port Range of PDKU2 in Slot 14  
Ports 012~019  
Ports 008~015  
Ports 008~015  
Ports 009 and 013  
Slot 14 User Names, PDNs, DID numbers, etc. Ports 012~019  
Swapped Logical Ports in Slot 14 Ports 013 and 017  
This type of phenomenon must occur on all DK Programs that contain port numbers to provide  
a transparent upgrade.  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
155  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
System/Station Administration  
CSN  
Phy.  
Log  
Int/  
(Cabinet Port  
Telephone  
PT Location  
Port PDN  
Telephone LCD  
User Name  
VM CF  
Id Code  
VM MW  
Id Code  
Slot  
No.)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
12  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
011  
012  
013  
014  
015  
016  
017  
018  
019  
DT LOBBY  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
011  
012  
017  
014  
015  
016  
013  
018  
019  
100 ATTENDANT NO:100  
101 NO:101  
91100  
91101  
91102  
91103  
91104  
91105  
91106  
91107  
91108  
91109  
91110  
91111  
91112  
91117  
91114  
91115  
91116  
91113  
91118  
91119  
92100  
92101  
92102  
92103  
92104  
92105  
92106  
92107  
92108  
92109  
92110  
92111  
92112  
92117  
92114  
92115  
92116  
92113  
92118  
92119  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
13  
13  
13  
13  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
DT  
DT  
102 NO:102  
DT  
103 NO:103  
DT  
104 NO:104  
DT TELEPHONE ROOM  
105 PHONE RM NO:105  
106 NO:106  
DT  
DT KITCHEN  
107 COOK NO:107  
108 NO:108  
DL  
DL  
109 NO:109  
DL  
110 NO:110  
DL  
111  
NO:111  
DT FRONT OFFICE  
112 BOSS NO:112  
117 PLAY RMNO:117  
114 NO:114  
DT PLAY ROOM  
DT  
DT  
115 NO:115  
DT  
116 NO:116  
DT  
113 NO:113  
DT  
118 NO:118  
DT BACK ROOM  
119 BACK RM NO:119  
Figure 33  
System/Station Administration Screen for RCTUE3/F3 Before Release 4 Upgrade  
System/Station Administration  
CSN  
Phy.  
Log  
Int/  
(Cabinet Port  
Telephone  
PT Location  
Port PDN  
Telephone LCD  
User Name  
VM CF  
Id Code  
VM MW  
Id Code  
Slot  
No.)  
No.  
No.  
No.  
12  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
011  
012  
013  
014  
015  
DT LOBBY  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
013  
010  
011  
012  
009  
014  
015  
100 ATTENDANT NO:100 91100  
92100  
92101  
92102  
92103  
92104  
92105  
92106  
92107  
92112  
92117  
92114  
92115  
92116  
92113  
92118  
92119  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
12  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
14  
DT  
101 NO:101  
91101  
91102  
91103  
91104  
91105  
91106  
91107  
91112  
91117  
91114  
91115  
91116  
91113  
91118  
91119  
DT  
102 NO:102  
DT  
103 NO:103  
DT  
104 NO:104  
DT TELEPHONE ROOM  
105 PHONE RM NO:105  
106 NO:106  
DT  
DT KITCHEN  
107 COOK NO:107  
112 BOSSNO:112  
117 PLAY RMNO:117  
114 NO:114  
DT FRONT OFFICE  
DT PLAY ROOM  
DT  
DT  
115  
116  
113  
NO:115  
NO:116  
NO:113  
DT  
DT  
DT  
118 NO:118  
DT BACK ROOM  
119 BACK RMNO:119  
Figure 34  
System/Station Administration Screen for RCTUE3/F3 After Release 4 Upgrade  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example  
Program Changes Before/After Release 4.0 Upgrade  
The following examples show the type of programs and data that must change when upgrading  
from DK14/DK16e/DK40 Release 1 and DK280/DK424 Release 1~Release 3 to DK424  
Release 4.0. These program changes are required to make the Strata DK operate the same after  
the upgrade as it did before; thus making the upgrade transparent to the end user. The changes  
apply to all DK424 Release 4.0, RCTU processors: RCTUA, RCTUB, RCTUBA/BB,  
RCTUC/D, and RCTUE/F.  
Basically, any program that has station ports as data needs to change if the station port  
numbers are higher than the pre-upgrade DID/Tie line port numbers. The examples shown  
here represent the types of DK programs that require changes when upgrading to Release 4.0.  
They are not meant to show all programs since the principles of program changes are the same  
for each program type.  
The program examples show required programming changes (when upgrading to a DK424  
Release 4.0 and above processor) can be complex when a system has DID and Tie lines.  
The following examples show the program changes required when upgrading RCTUE3/F3 to  
RCTUE3/F4. The DKAdmin Cabinet Drawing and System/Station Administration Screen for  
this example are provided in Figures 33~34.  
Programs 01 and 02  
These programs show the relationship between physical and logical ports. When upgrading to  
Release 4.0, these relationships remain the same unless ports have been swapped prior to the  
upgrade. If the swapped port numbers shift during the upgrade, they must be renumbered in  
Programs 01 and 02. If the swapped ports do not shift during the upgrade, they remain the  
same after the upgrade.  
In this system configuration, ports 013 and 017 are swapped prior to the upgrade (see Figure  
33). After the upgrade, port 013 shifts to 009 and 017 shifts to 013 (see Figure C-4), therefore  
after the upgrade port 009 is swapped with port 013. Notice that before and after the upgrade,  
the Play Room telephone is on the second PDKU circuit in slot 14 and to call the Play Room  
Telephone you must dial 117 - making the upgrade transparent to the end user.  
Program 03  
There is no change to the data in this program when upgrading to Release 4.0; however the  
RDDU DID lines are not allocated ports after the upgrade (see Figures 31 and 32).  
Program 04  
Data in this program must be changed to adjust for port shifting caused by the RDDU DID line  
PCB in slot 13 (see Figures 33 and 34):  
Before the Upgrade  
Port 000-007; Data 100-107  
Port 008-015; Data 108-115  
Port 016-019; Data 116-119  
After the Upgrade  
Port 000-007; Data 100-107  
Port 008-015; Data 112-119  
Port 016-019; Data Blank  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Programs 04, 05, 09  
*
There is no change to the data in these programs when upgrading to Release 4.0. Note that  
DID/Tie ports do not cause Phantom DN ports to shift in Strata DK Release 1~Release 3  
systems, so they do not shift in Program 04 when upgrading to Release 4.0. Also, the data in  
*
Program 09 is DN numbers and not port numbers, so data in Program 09 does not change  
when upgrading to Release 4.0.  
Program 09  
*
Data in this program must be changed to adjust for port shifting caused by the RDDU DID line  
PCB in slot 13 (see Figures 33 and 34):  
Before the Upgrade  
Port 000-007; Data 100-107  
Port 008-015; Data 108-115  
Port 016-019; Data 116-119  
After the Upgrade  
Port 000-007; Data 100-107  
Port 008-015; Data 112-119  
Port 016-019; Data Blank  
Programs 10-1 through 10-4  
There is no change to the data in these system programs when upgrading to Release 4.0. Port  
numbers are not assigned to system programs so no adjustments are necessary.  
Program 13  
If the Message Center is the Front Office Telephone (PDN 112), data in this program must be  
changed to adjust for port shifting caused by the RDDU DID line PCB in slot 13 (see Figures  
33 and 34):  
Data for Program 13 before the upgrade = 012  
Data for Program 13 after the upgrade = 008  
If the Message Center is the Lobby Telephone (PDN 100), data in this program must not be  
changed to adjust for port shifting caused by the RDDU DID line PCB in slot 13. This is  
because Port 000 did not shift after the upgrade (see Figures 33 and 34):  
Data for Program 13 before the upgrade = 000  
Data for Program 13 after the upgrade = 000  
Programs 15, 16, and 17  
There is no change to the data in these programs when upgrading to Release 4.0. These are CO  
line programs and port numbers are not assigned in them so no adjustments are necessary.  
Program 17  
*
If the DID Intercept Destination is the Back Room Telephone (PDN 119), data in this program  
must be changed to adjust for port shifting caused by the RDDU DID line PCB in slot 13 (see  
Figures 33 and 34):  
Program 17 data for DID lines 001~004 before the upgrade = 019  
*
Program 17 data for DID lines 001~004 after the upgrade = 015  
*
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example  
If the DID Intercept Destination is the Kitchen Telephone (PDN 107), data in this program  
must not be changed to adjust for port shifting caused by the RDDU DID line PCB in slot 13.  
This is because Port 007 did not shift after the upgrade (see Figures 33 and 34):  
Program 17 data for DID lines 001~004 before the upgrade = 007  
*
Program 17 data for DID lines 001~004 after the upgrade = 007  
*
Program 20  
If the Front Office Telephone (PDN 112) is equipped with an RPCI-DI to display DNIS and  
Caller ID on a PC running a TAPI application, the data in Program 20 must shift. This enables  
the Front Office Telephone and RPCI to operate the same way after the upgrade as it did  
before. Notice that all Program 20 data for port 012 moves port to 008.  
Before the Upgrade  
After the Upgrade  
LED17 on, all others off (Program 20 LED 01,02,10, 11, and 17 on, all  
Port 008  
Port 012  
default)  
others off  
LED 01,02,10, 11, and 17 on, all  
others off  
LED17 on, all others off  
Program 30  
If the Back Room Telephone (PDN 119) is programmed to dial forced and verified Account  
codes when making outside calls, the data in Program 30 must shift. This is to allow the Back  
Room Telephone to operate the same way after the upgrade as it did before. Notice that all  
Program 30 data for port 019 moves to port 015.  
Before the Upgrade  
After the Upgrade  
LED 01, 05, and 07 ON, all others off  
(Program 30 default)  
LED 01, 05, 07, 08, and 14 ON, all  
others off  
Port 015  
Port 019  
LED 01, 05, 07, 08, and14 on, all  
others off  
LED 01, 05, and 07 on, all others off  
(Program 30 default)  
Program 33  
If the Front Office telephone (DN 112) is programmed to hunt to the Back Room Telephone  
(PDN 119), the data in Program 33 must shift:  
Before the Upgrade  
After the Upgrade  
Hunt-From Port 012 to Port 019  
Hunt-From Port 008 to Port 015  
If the Front Office telephone (PDN112) is programmed to hunt to the Lobby Telephone  
(PDN 100), the data in Program 33 must shift:  
Before the Upgrade  
After the Upgrade  
Hunt-From Port 012 to Port 000  
Hunt-From Port 008 to Port 000  
Upgrading Strata DK Systems to DK424 Release 4.0  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DK424 Release 4.0 Upgrade Programming Example –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––  
Program 33  
*
If the Back Room telephone (PDN 119) is programmed as the Owner of PhDN 500, the data in  
Program 33 must shift:  
*
Before the Upgrade  
After the Upgrade  
PhDN Port 500 is owned by Port 019  
PhDN Port 500 is owned by Port 015  
Programs 39, 29, 29, and 59  
*
When a port number shifts from XXX to YYY during an Release 4.0 upgrade, the following  
Program changes must be made:  
In Program 39, the data set for port XXX must be copied over the data set for port YYY.  
In all Telephone/Console button programs, the appearances of the XXX port PDN/SDN  
Button (##XXX) and DSS Button (#XXX) must be changed to ##YYY and #YYY,  
respectively, on all keystrips.  
Example: The Front Office Telephone changes from port 012 to port 008 during the  
Release 4.0 upgrade (see Figures 33 and 34).  
As shown below, all the button functions of the Front Office Telephone do not change after the  
upgrade, but the Program 39 codes for PDN, SDN and DSS buttons change if the associated  
PDN/SDN or DSS port shifts. Also PhDN, Speed Dial, and Feature button codes do not  
change when ports shift.  
10-Button Keystrip for Front Office  
Telephone on Port 012 -Before Upgrade  
10-Button Keystrip for Front Office  
Telephone on Port 008 -After Upgrade  
Key No.  
K10  
Code  
497  
Name  
SDS  
Key No.  
K10  
Code  
497  
Name  
SDS  
K09  
498  
DND  
K09  
K08  
K07  
K06  
K05  
K04  
K03  
K02  
K01  
498  
DND  
K08  
K07  
K06  
K05  
K04  
K03  
K02  
K01  
*103  
*102  
*101  
#017  
##500  
##019  
#000  
##012  
SD103  
*103  
SD103  
SD102  
*102  
SD102  
SD101  
*101  
SD101  
DSS117  
PhDN 500  
SDN 119  
DSS100  
PDN 112  
#013  
##500  
##015  
#000  
##008  
DSS117  
PhDN 500  
SDN 119  
DSS100  
PDN 112  
Programs *42-1 and *42-2  
Although this example does not include an RDTU (T1) PCB, it should be noted that these  
programs require an RDTU slot number entry with DK Release 4.0. DK Admin/DK Backup  
automatically inserts the correct slot number for these programs during the upgrade process.  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
tenant lock, 92  
DNIS/DID ringing, 93  
DNIS/DID/ANI line, 89  
DSS console buttons, 65  
flexible buttons, 54, 61  
maintain directory numbers, 85  
speed dial, 55  
A
ACD  
administration, 70  
agent programs, 72  
edit ACD programs, 70  
edit agent programs, 72  
view notes on program, 71, 75  
ACD/DID assignments, 114  
add-on-module  
system messages, 56  
attendant console  
assigning features to another console, 67  
edit flexible buttons, 67  
flexible button assignments, 66  
key default settings, 67  
reset keys, 67  
change assigned feature, 64  
clear port, 64  
copy feature, 64  
edit assignments, 63  
make assignments to another port, 63  
administration  
attributes  
copy a range, 53  
definitions, 50  
program/update, 49  
ACD, 70  
administration menu, 43  
directory number, 85  
distributed hunt group, 92  
DNIS, 89  
download data, 74  
edit data, 74  
B
background char, 121  
backup  
program, 73  
station, 44  
system, 44  
upload data, 74  
data, 100  
menu, 99  
backup/restore option, 99  
check processor type option, 100  
basic operations, 2  
baud rate  
serial port, 124, 128  
baud rate (serial port), 105  
before you start, 27  
button assignment  
attendant console, 66  
DSS console, 65  
flexible, 61, 88  
view all programs, 74  
after connect string, 38, 131133, 135, 137  
assignments  
add-on-module buttons, 63  
attendant console buttons, 66  
call forward, 93  
CO line, 55  
ringing, 93  
distributed hunt group, 92  
DNIS  
network table, 91  
number/name/ringing/VM-ID, 90  
Index  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
on-screen information, 40  
phone number, 37  
record  
C
call forward  
assignments, 93  
create, 36  
delete, 39  
modify, 39  
set/change assignments, 93  
use system program files to edit, 94  
calling Strata DK using dialer, 129  
CAMA trunk programs (see E911/CAMA trunk  
programs  
select, 39  
upgrade processor, 37  
check processor type option, 100, 102, 108  
CO line, 55  
access codes, 91  
flexible key assignments, 88  
COM port, 124, 127  
D
data  
backup, 100  
download, 41, 100  
upload, 41  
data bits  
serial port, 124, 128  
dial DK, 131  
dialing strings, 40  
communication  
dialing strings, 41  
unable to establish, 100, 102, 109  
update dialing strings, 41  
communication setup  
display settings, 125  
option, 40, 100, 102  
directory numbers  
PC DIU/DIU modem pool to modem, 137  
remote modem to external modem/TTY  
port, 132  
administration, 85  
maintain assignments, 85  
set/change CO line flexible key  
assignments, 88  
remote modem to modem pool, 135  
remote modem/Strata DK IMDU, 133  
communications  
setup, 124  
connection  
set/change information, 86  
specify ringing options, 87  
distributed hunt group, 92  
display/update CO line ringing  
assignments, 93  
configurations, 127  
direct, 130  
DIU to DIU, 131  
external modem to Strata DK TTY port, 144  
hangup, 42  
display/update DNIS/DID ringing  
assignments, 93  
maintain assignments, 92  
DIU string, 37, 131133, 135, 137  
DK Admin  
logging off, 33  
DKAdmin  
PC DIU/DIU modem pool to Strata DK  
modem, 137  
remote modem to external modem/TTY  
port, 132  
remote modem to modem pool, 135  
remote modem to Strata DK IMDU (or external  
modem), 133  
basic operations, 2  
before you start, 27  
capabilities, 1  
connection to telephone system, 15  
first time run, 12, 22  
install program, 10, 20  
keyboard conventions, 31  
logging off, 33  
logging on, 27  
on-line help, 32  
password, 12, 22  
program list, 76  
Strata DK telephone system, 15, 25  
conventions  
keyboard, 31  
customer  
address, 37  
contact name, 37  
dialer setup, 130133, 135, 137  
ID, 37  
maintain file, 108  
name, 37  
pull-down menus, 32  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
screen conventions, 4  
security, 78  
software release, 38  
system requirements, 7  
using, 27  
maintain customer file option, 36  
select customer option, 39  
find feature, 5  
flexible buttons, 61  
change assigned feature, 61  
programming, 61  
DKBackup  
about, 42  
set/change CO lines, 88  
view assignments, 54  
backup/restore, 99  
check system, 17  
install program, 18  
software release, 38  
H
hangup connection option, 42  
hardware  
key, 18  
requirements, 127  
help (on-line), 32  
DNIS  
address reference numbers, 90  
administration, 89  
network table assignments, 91  
number/name/ringing/VM-ID  
assignments, 90  
I
tenant lock assignments, 92  
DNIS/DID ringing, 93  
DNIS/DID/ANI line assignments, 89  
documentation  
IMDU, 133  
individual port  
program, 46  
program/update attributes, 49  
update, 46  
conventions, viii  
how to use this manual, ix  
related, ix  
install program, 18  
installation, 10, 20  
system, 117  
download data, 41, 100  
DSS console  
ISDN programs  
assignments to another console/console  
group, 66  
button assignments, 65  
change assigned feature, 65  
default key settings, 65  
resetting all keys, 65  
access, 97  
edit programs, 97  
use Strata DK’s program files, 97  
view notes on program, 98  
K
keyboard, 31  
E
E911/CAMA trunk programs  
access, 94  
edit programs, 95  
L
LCD messages, 49  
line  
ringing options, 87  
logging off, 33  
logging on, 27  
use Strata DK’s program files, 96  
view notes on program, 96  
error messages, 32  
exit system, 33  
external modem, 133, 143144  
TTY port connection, 141  
M
maintain customer file option, 36  
menu  
F
file menu, 35, 115, 131, 133  
about option, 42  
administration, 43  
backup, 99  
dial DK, 132  
dial DK option, 40  
hangup connection option, 42  
DK dial, 132  
Index  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
file, 35, 115, 131, 133  
item selector, 119  
options, 117  
password level access, 123  
pull-down, 32  
external modem, 144  
PC DIU/DIU modem pool connection, 137  
port, 105  
string, 37, 131133, 135, 137  
modem pool  
system installation, 118  
menu options  
DIU connection, 129  
PC DIU/DIU, 137  
about, 42  
ACD administration, 70  
PDIU-DS installation, 141  
remote modem connection, 135  
ACD agent programs, 72  
ACD programs, 70  
add-on module button assignments, 63  
attendant console flexible button  
assignments, 66  
call forward assignments, 93  
change colors, 118  
check processor type, 100  
communications setup, 124  
company general information, 117  
dial DK, 40  
N
network telephone numbers, 91  
O
on-line help, 32  
options menu, 117  
P
[PDN]  
directory number administration, 85  
distributed hunt group administration, 92  
DNIS administration, 89  
DSS console button assignments, 65  
flexible button programming, 61  
hangup connection, 42  
maintain customer file, 36  
printer type selection, 119  
program administration, 73  
program security maintenance, 77  
reindex files, 125  
screen/type color installation, 118  
select customer, 39  
speed dial programming, 68  
station speed dial numbers, 69  
system installation, 117  
system miscellaneous variables, 120  
system speed dial numbers, 68  
system/station administration, 44  
telephone flexible button assignments, 61  
user password level setup, 121  
view/print data, 115  
changing information, 86  
parity  
serial port, 124, 128  
password, 12, 22  
add users, 122  
administrator level I access, 122  
administrator level II access, 122  
assign, 122  
changing user/password information, 124  
default levels, 77  
deleting user password, 124  
file maintenance program, 121  
level, 122  
level 1 and 2, 101  
level 9, 78  
level menu access, 123  
master access, 122  
set/change station port numbers, 92  
setup, 121  
station port numbers, 92  
tech level I access, 122  
PIOU/PIOUS/RSSU setup, 128  
port  
message  
error, 32  
system, 32, 56  
modem  
attributes  
copy a range, 53  
definitions, 50  
program/update, 49  
printing, 56  
port assignments, 108  
connection to Strata DK IMDU, 133  
direct modem initialization, 125  
DIU initialization, 125  
external maintenance modem installation, 142  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
print  
customer program, 115  
list, 76  
PRGALL, 76  
REPALL, 76  
security maintenance, 77  
port/station information, 47  
printer selection screen, 115  
printer type selection, 119  
select printer, 120  
programming  
flexible button, 61  
individual port attributes, 49  
speed dial, 68  
processor  
upgrade, 37  
upgrade RCTU processor, 107  
pull-down menus, 32  
program  
*04, 76, 108, 112, 114, 158  
*09, 76, 106, 108, 112, 158  
*17, 158  
Q
quick-start procedure  
new customer installation, 36  
*29, 160  
*33, 160  
*42-1, 160  
R
RCTU processor PCB upgrade, 107  
reindex files, 125  
remote modem  
connection to modem pool, 135  
external modem/TTY port, 132  
restore  
prior to restoring data, 102  
restoring data, 102  
ringing options, 87  
RMDS, 133  
running DKAdmin, 12, 22  
*42-2, 160  
00, 101, 114  
01, 157  
02, 157  
03, 76, 105, 109, 112, 114, 128, 150, 157  
04, 76, 106, 112, 114, 157  
05, 158  
09, 158  
10-1, 158  
10-2, 158  
10-3, 158  
10-4, 158  
13, 158  
15, 158  
16, 158  
17, 158  
20, 159  
29, 160  
30, 159  
33, 159  
38/39, 76  
39, 108, 160  
59, 160  
71-0, 108  
76, 76, 105, 112, 128  
76-0, 76, 150  
77-1, 102, 106, 128  
90, 76  
91, 76  
92, 76  
S
screen  
change colors, 118  
change your monitor or color setups, 118  
color installation, 118  
color/monochrome, 118  
conventions, 4  
mode, 118  
on-screen customer information, 40  
password file maintenance, 124  
printout destination selection matrix, 120  
process complete, 106, 112  
reset colors, 118  
security maintenance, 77  
system program file, 101  
type, 118  
variations, viii  
security  
92-1, 107, 113  
ACD, 70  
ACD Agent, 72  
administration, 73  
change password, 12, 22  
default levels, 78  
program maintenance, 77  
Index  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
select customer option, 39, 100, 102  
select printer, 120  
serial communications port, 124  
serial ports  
T
telephone flexible buttons  
assignments, 61  
change feature, 61  
baud rate, 105  
transfer  
shift-function keys, 121  
software release, 38  
speed dial numbers  
assignments, 55  
DK program data screen, 42  
TTY port, 105, 108, 129, 132, 141, 144  
U
upgrade  
change, 48  
edit station assignments, 69  
edit system assignments, 68  
programming, 68  
set, 48  
station assignment, 69  
system, 48  
DK system to DK424 R4, 149  
important things to do after, 147  
off-site, 145  
on-site, 146  
processor, 37  
RCTU processor, 107  
release 4 configurations, 149  
release 4 program example, 154  
to RCTUE/F, 145  
system assignment, 68  
station  
attributes  
copy a range, 53  
definitions, 50  
program/update, 49  
information, 47  
upload data, 41  
uploading programmed data, 56  
user password, 121  
speed dial numbers, 69  
stop bits  
V
serial port, 124  
variables  
serial ports, 128  
system  
background char, 121  
bell on, 120  
check requirements, 7, 17  
connection, 25  
change system variables, 120  
confirm entries, 120  
connection configurations, 127  
dial DK, 40  
error messages, 32  
exit, 33  
hardware requirements, 127  
install program, 10, 18, 20  
installation menu, 118  
logging off, 33  
proper case conversion, 121  
shift-function keys, 121  
view  
CO line assignments, 55  
customer program, 115  
flexible button assignments, 54  
notes on ACD program, 71, 75  
notes on E911/CAMA trunk programs, 96  
notes on ISDN programs, 98  
reports screen, 115  
logging on, 27  
messages, 32, 56  
miscellaneous variable, 120  
on-line help, 32  
program file, 101, 109  
program file screen, 101  
run for first time, 12, 22  
set/change LCD messages, 49  
speed dial numbers, 48, 68, 108  
Strata DK connection, 127  
system/station administration, 44  
DKAdmin/DKBackup  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Toshiba America Information Systems, Inc.  
Telecommunication Systems Division  
9740 Irvine Boulevard, Irvine, CA 92618  
Item Number: 4 0 1 6 1 5 8  
Part Number: D K A - U G - A D B K P - V C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Technika CRT Television LCD32 229 User Manual
Tektronix Car Amplifier 11A16 User Manual
Timex Watch W 194 User Manual
Toshiba Computer Drive MK4004GAH User Manual
TP Link Network Card TL WN7200N User Manual
Transition Networks Network Card NFXEXXX01 User Manual
Uniden Portable Radio GMRS520 User Manual
Uniden Telephone DSS7805 User Manual
Universal Remote Control Universal Remote RF30 User Manual
Vanguard Heating Indoor Fireplace SBVBNA User Manual